Home

Operating Instructions for advanced features

1. Playback Editing You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake 1 Select the menu Wa Playback Protect Single Multi 2 Select the picture Single setting Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again e Exit the menu after it is set Multi setting Press A V lt gt to select the pictures and then press MENU SET repeat e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again e Exit the menu after it is set Set Cancel E Cancelling all the Protect settings Select the menu DS Playback Protect Cancel e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e Even if you do not protect pictures on a card they cannot be deleted when the card s Write Protect switch is set to LOCK e The Protect feature is only designed to work with this camera e Even if you protect pictures on a card they will be deleted if the card is formatted e When you set pictures in a group to Protect the number of pictures with the Protect setting is displayed on the Protect icon of the group s top picture 263 O B Playback Editing Face Rec Edit You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images 1 Select the menu CAM Playback
2. Press V 2d u 2 Press lt P gt to select the self timer icon aY aHa 10 etc and then press A Ba Eene 3 Press lt gt to select the time setting for the self timer and then press MENU SET SEE Item Description of settings X Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed Xs After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed X When using a tripod etc this setting is a convenient way to avoid the jitter caused by pressing the shutter button u Shutter Drive Settings 4 Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then press it fully to take the picture e A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus Focus and exposure will be set when the shutter button is pressed halfway e If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a picture even when the subject is not focused set Focus Release Priority in the Custom menu to RELEASE P157 e The self timer indicator blinks and the shutter is activated after 10 seconds or 2 seconds e When 8 is selected the self timer indicator blinks again after the first and the second pictures are taken and the shutter is activated 2 seconds after it blinks E Cancelling the self timer Select single picture recording or EA from among the drive modes P178 e It is also possible to
3. Setting the compression rate of pictures Quality Applicable modes P A S M c1 c2 c3 ENA Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored Ua Rec Quality Settings Description of settings nis a JPEG image in which image quality was given priority JPEG A standard image quality JPEG image etal This is useful for increasing the number of shots without changing the number of pixels ose i RAWs RAW JPEG You can record a hee image and a JPEG image g s or RAW z simultaneously RAW RAW You can only record RAW images 1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera the corresponding JPEG image will also be deleted 2 It is fixed to maximum recordable pixels L for each image aspect ratio u Image and Picture Quality Settings e You can enjoy more advanced picture editing if you use RAW files You can save RAW files in a file format JPEG TIFF etc that can be displayed on your PC etc develop them and edit them using the software SILKYPIX Developer Studio by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory on the CD ROM supplied RAW images are recorded with a smaller data volume than RAWs s or RAW Not available in these cases e The following effects are not reflected in RAW images Photo Style Highlight Shadow i Dynamic Red Eye Removal i Resolution Color Space Rec menu Scene Guide Mode Creativ
4. e Some images may not be sent depending on the device e For details on how to send images refer to P307 Preparations e You can print out recorded pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge wireless LAN compatible printer x Compliant with the DPS over IP standards For details on the PictBridge wireless LAN compatible printer contact the respective company 1 Select the menu Mi New Connection Send Images Stored in the Camera Printer Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 Select a printer you want to connect Select pictures and then print The procedure for selecting picures is the same as the one for when the USB connection cable is connected For details refer to P327 e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 AON e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract Not available in these cases e Motion pictures cannot be printed out U Wi Fi NFC When sending images to AV device You can send pictures and motion pictures to AV devices in your house home AV devices You can also send them to the devices external AV devices of your family or friends living away from you via LUMIX CLUB a M d GE O a Wireless access point AV device Home AV device External E Methods for sending and images that can be sent 3D Sending an
5. e You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in Multi e The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate T2 Not available in these cases e You cannot use Resize for the following pictures Motion pictures Pictures taken with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Group Pictures Pictures stamped with Text Stamp Pictures taken with RAWs RAW z or RAW 207 O B Playback Editing Cropping You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture 1 Select the menu CA Playback Cropping 2 Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET 3 Use the rear dial and press A W lt gt to select the parts to be cropped Rear dial right Enlargement Rear dial left Reduction A V lt 4 gt Move e You can also touch yk to enlarge reduce e You can also move by dragging on the screen 4 Press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate e Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once e When you crop pictures in a group the cropped ones are saved separately from the original ones in the group e Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images having u
6. while pausing Playing back each Group Pictures 1 Select a picture with the group display icon k l AD and then press V e The same operation can T ean eY by touching the group display icon Sa b X 2 Press lt gt to flip through images e Touch E or press V again to return to the normal playback screen e Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played back Such as Multi Playback Playback Zoom and deleting images 2D 3D Settings Playback methods for the 3D pictures can be switched e This is a menu that is only displayed when 3D playback is possible Refer to P313 for details v Playback Editing You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronisation with music and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures only motion pictures only 3D pictures etc We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a TV 1 Select the menu MEM Playback gt Slide Show Select the group to play back by pressing A V and then press MENU SET e Refer to P313 for the method to play back 3D pictures in Picture Only 3D Video Only e During Category Selection press A V lt P to select a 3D category and then press MENU SET Refer to P245 for category details Press A t
7. Face Rec Edit _ gt REPLACE DELETE 2 Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET 3 Press lt P gt to select the person and then press MENU SET 4 When REPLACE is selected Press A W lt gt to select the person to replace and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e Cleared information regarding the Face Recog cannot be restored e When all Face Recognition information in a picture has been cancelled the picture will not be categorised using Face Recognition in Category Play Delete Confirmation This sets which option Yes or No will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed Yes No 1 Select the menu EMU Playback Delete Confirmation gt 2 Press A F to select an item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Yes first Yes is highlighted first so deletion can be done quickly No first No is highlighted first Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided e Exit the menu after it is set 264 u Wi Fi NFC Wi Fi function NFC function E Use the camera as a wireless LAN device When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than wireless LAN devices ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs and defects for the syste
8. O Tips e Open the flash You can set to e White saturation can occur if the subject is too close e Flash pictures taken closer or beyond the flash s rated distance may appear too bright or too dark 2 e When Silent Mode is set to ON the flash is not activated l Relaxing Tone The warm colour tone creates an image with a relaxing mood f Sweet Child s Face Moderate background defocusing and skin tone highlighted draws attention to the child s face Touch the face e A still picture is recorded with the focus and exposure set for the touched location O Tips e If you are using a lens with the zoom function you can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the distance between the camera and the subject Recording Modes O Distinct Scenery Saturation of sky and trees creates more distinct scenery Bright Blue Sky On a sunny day the overall screen brightness is increased to create a vibrant image of the blue sky Romantic Sunset Glow The enhanced purple tone creates a romantic image of the sky just after sunset I Vivid Sunset Glow Red is enhanced to create a vivid image of the sunset Glistening Water Recording Modes The glisten of the water is enhanced to look brighter and slightly bluish e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if
9. Press lt P gt to select the recording interval seconds press A V to set it and press MENU SET Press A V to select Start and then press MENU SET Press A V to select New and then press MENU SET Press the shutter button fully e Up to 9999 frames can be recorded Move the subject to decide on the composition e Repeat recording in the same way e If the camera is turned off during recording a message for resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is turned on Selecting Yes allows you to resume the recording from the interruption point O Recording materials skilfully e The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously Use them as reference for the amount of movement e Pressing allows you to check recorded pictures Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing 1 6 Pressing again will return you to the recording screen Touch to end the recording e It can also be ended by selecting Stop Motion Animation from the Rec menu and then pressing MENU SET e When Auto Shooting is set to ON select End on the confirmation screen If Pause has been selected press the shutter button fully to resume the recording e Confirmation screen is displayed It is ended when Yes is selected e Confirmation screen for creating a motion picture is displayed next so select Yes Select the methods for creating a motion picture e The recording f
10. Auto Gain Overlay 3 Decide on the composition and take the first picture e After taking the picture press the shutter button halfway 4 down to take the next picture aN we e Press A V to select the item and then press MENU SET for one of the following operations Next Advance to the next picture Retake Return to the first picture Exit Record the image of the first picture and finish the multiple exposure picture taking session 4 Shooting the second third and fourth exposures e If Fn2 is pressed while taking pictures the photographed images are recorded and the multiple exposure picture taking session will be completed 5 Press Y to select Exit and then press MENU SET e You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish vu Focus and Exposure Settings E About Automatic Gain Control setting Select Auto Gain on the screen shown in step 7 and set it ON The brightness level is adjusted according to the number of pictures taken and the pictures are Superimposed over each other OFF Compensate the exposure to match the subject so that all the superimposed exposure effects will be just right E Combining RAW images in the card On the screen shown in step 1 set Overlay to ON After Start Images in the card will be displayed Select the RAW images press MENU SET and continue recording e Overlay is available only for RAW images taken with this
11. It will perform optimisation of imaging device and Pixel Refresh image processing Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have Sensore eaning affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed The card is formatted s CY P59 P59 P59 P59 P59 P59 P60 P60 P60 P60 fomes CY 5 This menu lets you set the Protection Cropping or Print Settings etc of recorded pictures 2D 3D Settings Switches the playback method for 3D images P241 Slide Show Selects the type etc of the images and plays back in P242 order Playback Mode Selects the type etc of the images and plays back only P245 particular images The location information longitude latitude acquired Location Logging by the smartphone tablet can be sent to the camera P247 and written in images Clear Retouch You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the P248 pictures taken Title Edit Input texts comments on the recorded pictures P250 Text Stamp Stamps the recorded pictures with recording date and P251 time names travel destination travel date etc Video Divide Splits the recorded motion picture in two P254 Creates a motion picture from a set of group pictures Mime Lapse vireo recorded with the Time Lapse Shot Stop Motion Video Creates a motion picture from the Stop Motion P256 Animation group Resize Reduces the image size number of pixels P257 C
12. Move the camera towards the edge of the range you wish to record The edge of the range will not be recorded in the last frame E About playback Pressing A will start scrolling playback automatically in the same direction as the recording e The following operations can be performed during scrolling playback A Start panorama playback Pause x When the playback is paused you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the screen When the scroll bar is touched the playback position jumps to the touched position vue Recording Modes e The optimal speed for moving the camera varies depending on the lens being used e When the focal length is long such as when a telephoto lens is attached move the camera slowly e The focus white balance and exposure are fixed at the optimum values for the first picture As a result if the focus or brightness changes substantially during recording the entire panorama picture may not be recorded at the suitable focus or brightness e When an image effect is added the White Balance is fixed to AWB e When multiple pictures are combined to create a single panorama picture the subject may appear distorted or the connection points may be noticeable in some cases e The number of recording pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions of the panorama picture varies depending on the recording direction and the number of combined pictures The maximum n
13. Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures 1 Connect the printer and camera with the USB connection cable supplied e Check the directions of the connectors and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out Otherwise the connectors may bend out of shape which will cause a malfunction e Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic USB connection cable DMW USBC1 optional a USB connection cable supplied Align the marks and insert 2 Press A F to select PictBridge PTP and then press MENU SET e Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor optional If the remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected the status indicator blinks and the alarm beeps If this happens during printing stop printing at once If not printing disconnect the USB connection cable e Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while X Cable disconnect prohibit icon is displayed May not be displayed depending on the type of printer used e Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor optional turn the camera off e Before inserting or removing a card turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection cable Not available in these cases e Motion pictures recorded cannot be printed out 326 Connecting to other equipment 4 i Selecting a single picture and
14. Pictures taken with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Pictures taken with RAWs RAW or RAW 249 2 Playback Editing Title Edit You can add text comments to pictures After text has been registered it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp P251 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Title Edit Single Multi Select an image to add text e KXQ is displayed for pictures with titles already registered Single setting Press lt gt to select the picture Press MENU SET Multi setting Press A V lt to select the picture and then press MENU SET repeat e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again Press lt to select OK and then press MENU SET to execute Enter the text P61 e Exit the menu after it is set e To delete the title erase all the text in the text input screen e You can print out texts comments using the PHOTOfunSTUDIO bundled software on the CD ROM supplied e You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with Multi T2 Not available in these cases e You cannot use Title Edit for the following pictures Motion pictures Pictures taken with RAW RAW Or RAW 250 Playback Editing You can stamp the recording date time name location travel date or title onto the recorded pictures amp 1 Select the menu 5 CAm Playback Text Stamp Singl
15. When using the interchangeable lens H H020A that does not support the zoom Enlarges distant subject Enlarges distant subject side Widens angle of view Widens angle of view x1 The zoom speed varies depending on how far you move the lever x2 When operating the zoom with the cursor buttons press the function button to which Zoom Control in Fn Button Set P47 of the Custom menu has been set The zoom operation is terminated when the function button is pressed again or a certain amount of time passes x3 Zoom quickly with A V and zoom slowly with lt gt x4 Operation with the cursor buttons is available only when Ex Tele Conv in the Rec menu is set to ZOOM Stavio Zoom ara Pesh O O Raising the telescopic effect Applicable modes lP A s M encc2lc ENA The Extra Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without deteriorating the picture quality When taking pictures Ex Tele Conv Max 2x x When a picture size of S 4 M aspect ratio of 4 3 is selected The magnification level differs depending on Picture Size and Aspect Ratio settings e Set the picture size to M or S picture sizes indicated with 34 and set the quality to sts or z Ex Tele Conv oS 2 4x FHD 50p FHD 50i FHD 25p FHD 24p 3 6 HD 50p HD 25p 4 8x VGA 25p When recording motion pictures Ex Tele Conv VG Stabiliser Zoom and Fl
16. White Balance P134 EA 0 54 wm Flash P222 224 Mt SK ant Intelligent Dynamic ve Range Control P142 OD Metering Mode P168 98 Number of recordable pictures P36 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time with the Remaining Disp setting in the Custom menu 338 s CY a E In playback 1 98 Picture number Total pictures 9 pic Number of pictures in burst SS Motion picture recording m30s time P77 S E Clear Retouch completed icon P248 1 a Currently retrieving DlOli information icon P343 Playback Mode P245 Plavback Motion Pict Fa cs ayback Motion Pictures On Protected picture P263 at aR Number of prints P261 Number of days that have i ami 1ST DAY passed since the departure lla P260 _ date P52 ix Cable disconnect prohibit icon Burst Picture Group Display af P326 P241 a ied Motion picture playback P77 Time Lapse Shot Picture Play panorama P111 Group Display P241 Continuous Burst Picture Display for the Stop Motion A Group Playback P241 a Animation Group P241 Continuous Time Lapse Shot AQ Silent Mode P195 NN Picture Group Playback month 10days Age P202 ee Multi
17. e For details on hardware requirements and installation read About the supplied software P321 Create a folder that receives images with PHOTOfunSTUDIO e To create the folder automatically select Auto create To specify a folder create a new folder or set a password to the folder select Create manually e For details refer to the operating instructions of PHOTOfunSTUDIO PDF E When not using PHOTOfunSTUDIO For Windows Supported OS Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Example Windows 7 1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving then right click 2 Select Properties then enable sharing of the folder e For details refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system For Mac Supported OS OS X v10 4 to v10 8 Example OS X v10 8 1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving then click on the items in the following order File Get Info Enable sharing of the folder e For details refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system 286 Wi Fi NFC Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Q Recording 1 Select the menu SS MA New Connection Send Images While Recording PC 5 2 Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 Y7 3 Select the PC you want to connect to e When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed select Manual
18. 3 Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the hole on the other side of the stopper 4 Pull the other side of the shoulder strap and then check that it will not come out e Perform steps 1 to 4 and then attach the other side of the shoulder strap e Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder Do not wrap the strap around your neck It may result in injury or accident e Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck 25 u Preparation 4 Charging the Battery E About batteries that you can use with this unit It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine product are made available for purchase in some markets Some of these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack To ensure that safe products are used we recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used e Use the dedicated charger and battery Charging e The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped Charge the battery before use e Charge the battery with the charger indoors 1 Attach the battery paying attention
19. 8 x10 LETTER CARD SIZE Description of settings Settings on the printer are prioritised 89 mmx 127 mm 127 mmx 178 mm 100 mmx 148 mm 101 6 mmx 180 6 mm 210 mmx297 mm 297 mmx 420 mm 100 mmx 150 mm 101 6 mmx 152 4 mm 203 2 mmx254 mm 216 mmxX279 4 mm 54 mmx 85 6 mm e Paper sizes not supported by the printer will not be displayed E Page Layout Layouts for printing that can be set with this unit Item a pepe Description of settings Settings on the printer are prioritised 1 picture with no frame on 1 page 1 picture with a frame on 1 page 2 pictures on 1 page 4 pictures on 1 page e An item cannot be selected if the printer does not support the page layout 329 u Connecting to other equipment E Layout printing When printing a picture several times on 1 sheet of paper For example if you want to print the same picture 4 times on 1 sheet of paper set Page Layout to 8 and then set Num of prints to 4 for the picture that you want to print When printing different pictures on 1 sheet of paper For example if you want to print 4 different pictures on 1 sheet of paper set Page Layout to B8 and then set Num of prints to 1 for each of the 4 pictures e The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the indication lights orange during printing After finishing printing make sure there are no problems with the printer e lf the number of prints is high the p
20. Blue I Display Orange L_ White Color e Changing the Detect Level setting also changes the Display Color setting as follows L_ Light blue lt fj Blue Z1 Yellow gt I Orange E Green gt _ White e When Peaking is set IREAIGH Detect Level HIGH or REAL Detect Level LOW will be displayed e Each time el in ik is touched the setting is switched in order of ON Detect Level LOW ON Detect Level HIGH OFF e Each time the set function button is pressed when Peaking is set to Fn Button Set P47 in the Custom menu the peaking setting switches in order of ON Detect Level LOW ON Detect Level HIGH OFF e This function works in Manual Focus or when focus is being adjusted manually with AF MF e Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in focus portions portions to be highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions e The colour used for highlighting does not affect recorded images SET Fo Displaying not displaying the MF Guide Wa Custom MF Guide ON OFF v MF ASSIST E Displaying the MF Assist e lt can be displayed by rotating the focus ring moving the focus lever pinching out P16 the screen or touching the screen twice In the Creative Control Mode Miniature Effect MF Assistance cannot be displayed by touch
21. ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum ISO125 CANI Rec gt Extended ISO Settings ON OFF 177 Shutter Drive Settings Select a Drive Mode Applicable modes mM P ASM Selecting the drive mode allows you to switch the operation such as burst recording or the self timer for when you press the shutter button U 1 Press Y Si 2 Press lt gt to select the drive mode and then press MENU SET Drive mode Drive mode Description of settings When the shutter button is pressed only one picture is Single P65 recorded Recordings are made in succession while the shutter Burst P179 button is pressed Each time the shutter button is pressed recordings Auto Bracket P183 are made with different exposure settings according to the Exposure Compensation range When the shutter button is pressed recording takes Self Timer P186 place after the set time has elapsed e To cancel the drive mode select ES The setting will switch to Single e Settings for each drive mode can be changed by pressing A Not available in these cases e Not available with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Shutter Drive Settings Taking Pictures using Burst Mode Applicable modes MPAs M Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed e Pictures taken with a burst speed of SH will be recorded as a single burst
22. Panasonic Operating Instructions for advanced features Digital Camera vodno DMIC GX7 Please read these instructions carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use MICRO CERTIFIED FOURTHIRDS CERTIFIED fc W dina P XC I VQT5B27 FO713YKO Finding the information you need In this Operating Instructions for advanced features you can find the information you need from the following pages By clicking a page number you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the information Search from the menu list Bs4s 3 Search from Contents Menu list P Ree ee ee P345 Search from Names Motion Picture cccccccccsseceee u P348 and Functions of CUR Cie eee P349 Component 33 Setup re P352 Playback cceceeeeeeeeeeee P354 Search from Monitor Display Search from P3 7 T 9 55 i Viewfinder Display troubleshooting Search from the list of on screen messages Bea Message Display For details on how to use this manual see the next page Wi Fi function NFC function P265 P3 Ee How to use this manual Click this icon to jump to Finding the information you need Click this icon to jump to Contents Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page About the indication of the applicable mode Applicable modes PJ A S M fem c1 c2 c3 The
23. Quality HDR i Dynamic Panorama Settings Red Eye Removall i Resolution Shading Comp Ex Tele Conv still pictures Digital Zoom SH of Burst Rate Stabilizer Multi Exp x2 The setting is fixed as shown below Aspect ratio Picture size 4 3 1824 x 1368 pixels 3 2 1824x1216 pixels 16 9 1824x1024 pixels 1 1 17121712 pixels x3 When attaching 3D interchangeable lens the following icons are displayed ED tz 3D Fine Both MPO images and fine JPEG images are recorded simultaneously EN z 8D Standard Both MPO images and standard JPEG images are recorded simultaneously x4 The Optical Image Stabiliser of the camera will operate Custom menu e AF AE Lock Quick AF Eye Sensor AF Direct Focus Area Focus Release Priority Shutter AF Pinpoint AF Time AF Assist Lamp AF MF MF Assist MF Guide Power Zoom Lens Video Button Rec Area Remaining Disp Touch AF Touch Pad AF in Touch Settings Q NO Connecting to other equipment O i Playing back 3D pictures B Connecting the camera to a 3D compatible television and playing back pictures taken in 3D allows you to enjoy 3D pictures for extra impact It is also possible to play back the recorded 3D pictures by inserting an SD card into the 3D compatible television with an SD card slot Preparations Set the HDMI Mode to AUTO 1080p or 1080i P57 Set the 3D Playback to 3D P58 Conne
24. Turn this unit off and on The card is not recognised by the PC Disconnect the USB connection cable Connect it again while the card is inserted in the camera If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC try connecting the USB connection cable to another USB terminal The card is not recognised by the PC SDXC memory card is used Check if your PC is compatible with SDXC memory cards http panasonic net avc sdcard information SDXC html A message prompting to format the card may be displayed when connecting but do not format If the Access displayed on the monitor does not disappear disconnect the USB connection cable after turning this unit off 368 fomes CY The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer e Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge Set to PictBridge PTP in USB Mode P56 326 The ends of the pictures are cut at printing When using a printer with a Cropping or borderless printing function cancel this function before printing For details refer to the operating instructions for the printer When you order photo studios to print pictures ask the photo studio if the 16 9 pictures can be printed The panorama picture is not printing correctly e Since aspect ratio of a panorama picture differs from normal pictures it may not always be possible to print it correctly Please use
25. When Rec Format is set to VGA 25p in MP4 When the FHD 24p is set only when f still picture priorities is set gt When Ex Tele Conv in the Motion Picture menu is set to ON only when still picture priorities is set 234 2 Motion Picture Using the Motion Picture Menu For details on Motion Picture menu settings refer to P40 e Photo Style Metering Mode Highlight Shadow i Dynamic i Resolution and Digital Zoom are common to both the Rec menu and Motion Picture menu Changing these settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu e Motion Picture menu is not displayed in the following cases Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Soft Image of a Flower Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Soft Focus Star Filter Sunshine Creative Control Mode Rec Format e Refer to P228 for details Rec Quality e Refer to P228 for details Exposure Mode e Refer to P125 for details Picture Mode e Refer to P233 for details Continuous AF e Refer to P230 for details 235 v Motion Picture Rec Highlight Applicable modes fsm C1 C2 c3 White saturated areas appear blinking in black and white Settings ON OFF e lf there are any white saturated areas we recommend compensating the exposure towards negative P166 referring to the histogram
26. e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 Manual Input gt pisP Update E When connecting with Manual Input 1 2 5 On the screen displayed in step 7 of If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility connecting by Manual Connection select Manual Input Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to then select Set e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 Select the network authentication type e For information on network authentication see the manual of the wireless access point Select the encryption type e The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network authentication settings Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set WPA2 PSK WPA PSK TKIP AES Common Key WEP Open No Encryption WEP When an option other than No Encryption is selected Enter the encryption key e Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless access point e If no connection can be established the wireless access point s radio waves may be too weak Refer to Message Display P341 and Troubleshooting P355 for details e Transmission speed may decrease or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used in 303 Wi Fi NFC d Connecting from a location away from your
27. e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 Take pictures To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 You cannot change the settings while sending pictures Wait until sending is complete WK ON oO 283 O B Wi Fi NFC Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera 1 Select the menu Mi New Connection Send Images Stored in the Camera AV device 2 Select Home or External 3 Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 e When External is selected Direct cannot be selected 4 Select a device you want to connect e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 5 Select Single Select or Multi Select e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 Single Select setting Select the picture Select Set Multi Select setting Select the picture repeat e The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected again Select OK The number of pictures that can be sent by Multi Select is limited e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected 284 Wi Fi NFC d When sending images to PC You can send pictures and motion pictures recorded y with this unit to a PC Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording Sending sele
28. menu to ON P90 2 It is displayed when the Monitor Info Disp of the Custom menu is set to ON P73 Settings can be adjusted directly by touching each of the items displayed on the screen Basic d L viewfinder style e Screen will switch as follows Example of display on viewfinder With information detailed information With information CQ With information detailed information tilt sensor display Q With information tilt sensor display x Histograms are displayed when the Histogram of the Custom menu is set to ON It is also possible to display the Exposure meter by setting the Expo Meter of the Custom menu to ON P90 e lf approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed part of the display will disappear Press DISP or touch the monitor to make the display reappear Fo Switching the display method of the monitor LANI Custom Monitor Disp Style EJ viewfinder style E monitor style Fo Switching the display method of the viewfinder AN Custom LVF Disp Style LA viewfinder style EJ monitor style D Y 2 peso CY Fo Displaying not displaying the histogram CAm Custom Histogram ON OFF Position can be set by dragging the histogram A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis black to white and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the ver
29. Custom Mode ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeees 128 e Registering Personal Menu Settings Registering custom settings 128 e Recording using registered custom Set cccsccssseeessseeeceserecseeesseeeseueres 129 Image and Picture Quality Settings Adjusting the Picture Quality by Adding an Effect Photo Style 130 Adjusting Bright Dark Portions Highlight Shadow ccssseseseeeeeeees 132 Adjusting the White Balance ccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaneeseaaeneeneseennenseaes 134 Setting the Picture Quality and SiZe ccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseneeeeees 139 e Setting the aspect ratio Of PICTUILES eee cceecceececeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeees 139 Settngthe numberof pixels n nnna as ampree ey Raber etree tere te tener an teeter earner 139 e Setting the compression rate of pictures Quality ccccecceseeeeeeeeeees 140 Setting Image Related FUNCTIONS ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesenenenneees 142 e Compensating the contrast and exposure i Dynamic Intelligent dynamic range Control ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 e Raising the resolution i RESOlUtION cccceccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeees 142 e Combining pictures with different exposures HDR ccccceceeeeeeeees 143 e Reducing the long shutter noise Long Shtr NR cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees
30. DISP and then S 2B Wi Fi NFC d E Changing the connection method select the connection method SSID Password a oe gt DISP Change method On the camera Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 On your smartphone tablet When connecting with Via Network 1 Turnon the Wi Fi function 2 Select the wireless access point you want to connect to and set 3 Start Image App P269 When connecting with Wi Fi Direct or WPS Connection in Direct Start Image App P269 271 pwiemro CY O i Connecting to a smartphone tablet by using the NFC function Using the NFC Near Field Communication function you can easily transfer data necessary for a Wi Fi connection between this camera and the smartphone tablet E Compatible models This function can be used with the NFC compatible device with Android OS version D 2 3 3 or higher excluding some models e For information on the operation and settings of NFC compatible smartphones tablets refer to the operating instructions of your device Preparation On your smartphone tablet e Check that your smartphone tablet is a compatible model e Turn on the Wi Fi function e Install the Image App in advance P269 On the camera e Set NFC Operation to ON P309 1 Launch Image App on your smartphone tablet 2 While 8 is displayed on the connection screen of the Image App touch t
31. DISP before determining the focus position the AF area frame returns to the centre position e To cancel the AF area frame when the Auto Focus Mode P146 is set to 8 Face Detection T AF Tracking or E 23 Area press MENU SET e The Touch Shutter function P67 is disabled when using Touch Pad AF sse o Taking a Still picture e Set the drive mode to single by pressing W amp 1 Select the Recording Mode P69 2 Press the shutter button halfway to focus U a Aperture value Shutter speed e Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved except when set to flash e When the image is correctly focused the picture will be taken since the Focus Release Priority P157 is set initially to FOCUS Focus Mode AFS When the subject is When the subject is not Focus focused focused Focus indication Blinks AF area opem F Sound Beeps 2 times Focus Mode AFF AFC When the subject is When the subject is not Focus focused focused Focus indication Blinks or Off aiia ereen o Sound Beeps 2 times x1 When AF Mode is set to E the first AF area at which focus is achieved may be displayed momentarily while pressing halfway x2 A beep will be emitted when focus is first achieved during the pressing halfway e When the brightness is insufficient for AFF or AFC the camera will operate as i
32. Rec Quality and then press MENU SET Press A V to select the item and then press MENU SET e Exit the menu after it is set 228 Motion Picture d When AVCHD is selected WS FHD 50p 1920x 1080 28 Mbps l 0 FHD 50i 1920x1080 17 Mbps Y FHD 25p 1920x1080 24 Mbps FHD 24p 1920x1080 24 Mbps HD 50p 1280x720 17 Mbps x1 AVCHD Progressive x2 The sensor output is 25 frames second When MP4 is selected FHD 25p 20 Mbps HD 25p 25p 10 Mbps VGA 25p 4 Mbps E About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures Even when a compatible device is used recorded motion pictures may be played back with reduced picture and sound quality or they may not be played back Also recording information may not be displayed correctly Use this unit to playback in such case e lf you want to use another device to play back motion pictures recorded in FHD 50p FHD 25p FHD 24p of AVCHD or if you want to transfer them to the device a PC installed with PHOTOfunSTUDIO or a compatible Blu ray disc recorder is required 229 U Motion Picture 4 E Indication of the icon a Format Size fi Frame rate sensor output i 8 FHD 50 e What is bit rate This is the volume of data for a definite period of time and the quality becomes higher when the number gets bigger This unit is using the VBR recording method VBR is an abbreviation for V
33. This is convenient as it allows you to take pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor viewfinder e Do not cover the AF Assist Lamp with your fingers or other objects Taking pictures at a high angle Taking pictures at a low angle Before Use 4 i Touch screen D 2 Touch panel of this unit is capacitive Touch the panel directly with your bare finger E Touch To touch and release the touch screen Use for selecting items or icons e When selecting features using the touch screen be sure to touch the centre of the desired icon E Drag A movement without releasing the touch screen This is used to move the AF area operate the slide bar etc This can also be used to move to the next image during playback etc E Pinch enlarge reduce Pinch the touch panel apart enlarge or together reduce with two fingers Use to enlarge reduce the played back images or AF area vu Before Use e Touch the panel with the clean and dry finger e lf you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet please follow the instructions that accompany the sheet Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability e Do not press on the monitor with hard pointed tips such as ball point pens e Do not operate with your fingernails e Wipe the monitor with dry soft cloth when it gets dirty with finger prints and others e Do not scratch or press the monitor too hard e For in
34. U Focus and Exposure Settings 4 Taking Pictures with Manual Focus Applicable modes mMe lP AS Mleneca cN Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate Auto Focus The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens When using the interchangeable lens When using the interchangeable lens H H020A H FS1442A having a focus ring having a focus lever Rotate to side 7 Move to side Focuses on nearby YAS Ned Focuses on nearby subject lt x vy subject Rotate to side A JIA Move to side Focuses on Sp Focuses on faraway subject faraway subject e The focusing speed varies depending on how far you move the focus lever Set the focus mode lever to MF 2 Use the focus lever or focus ring on the lens to achieve focus a Indicator for infinity e When you focus manually display is switched to the assist screen and the image is enlarged MF Assist When Peaking in the Custom menu is set to ON in focus portions are highlighted e When MF Guide on the Custom menu is set to ON and you focus manually the MF guide is displayed on the screen You can check whether the point of focus is to the near side or the far side D Yy 2 Focus and Exposure Settings Fo Achieving focus quickly using Auto Focus Wa Custom AF AE Lo
35. during motion picture recording O B Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 O e Under fluorescent lighting LED lighting fixture etc the appropriate White Balance will vary depending on the lighting type so use AWB or 4 244 e The White Balance is only calculated for subjects within the range of the camera s flash P217 e The White Balance setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off However the White Balance setting for a Scene Mode returns to AWB when the Scene Mode is changed e In the Scene Guide Modes listed below White Balance is fixed to AWB Backlit Softness Relaxing Tone Distinct Scenery Bright Blue Sky Romantic Sunset Glow Vivid Sunset Glow Glistening Water Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Clear Night Portrait Appetizing Food Cute Dessert e When Direct Focus Area P155 is set to ON the operations on the cursor buttons translate to movements of the AF area Set using the Quick Menu P43 E Auto White Balance Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken the pictures may take on a reddish or bluish tinge Furthermore when a multiple number of light sources are being used or there is nothing with a colour close to white Auto White Balance may not function properly In a case like this set the White Balance to a mode other than AWB 1 Auto White Balance wil
36. is fixed to NORMAL U Preparation USB Mode Select the USB communication system when connecting the camera to your PC or your printer with the USB connection cable supplied 1 Select on connection Select either PC or PictBridge PTP if you connected the camera to a PC or a printer supporting PictBridge da PictBridge PTP Set when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge PC Set when connecting to a PC u Preparation Output This sets how the unit connects to a television etc Video Out Set to match the colour television system in each country NTSC Video output is set to NTSC system PAL Video output is set to PAL system e This will operate when the AV cable optional or HDMI mini cable is connected TV Aspect Set to match the type of TV 16 9 When connecting to a 16 9 screen TV 4 3 When connecting to a 4 3 screen TV e This will work when the AV cable optional is connected HDMI Mode Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high definition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI mini cable AUTO The output resolution is automatically set based on the information from the connected TV 1080p The progressive method with 1080 available scan lines is used for output 1080i The interlace method with 1080 available scan lines is used for output 720p The progressive method with 7
37. nyil e When a tripod is used we recommended that Operation Mode be set to OFF e We recommend taking pictures with the viewfinder when panning in Not available in these cases e When Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode is set ia of the Optical Image Stabiliser cannot be used e The stabiliser function may not be effective in the following cases Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button When there is a lot of jitter When the zoom magnification is high When using the Digital Zoom When taking pictures while following a moving subject When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places e The panning effect in pi is more difficult to achieve in the following cases In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer s day When the shutter speed is faster than 1 100th of a second When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly The background will not become a blur When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily 205 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d Using the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit Applicable modes eP A S M If your lens does not support the Optical Image Stabiliser function or is not based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard the Optical Image Stabiliser of this unit can be used P203 e The Optical Image Sta
38. press MENU SET 3 Press A V to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU SET 4 Press A V to select the function you want to assign and then press MENU SET e Refer to P48 for Setting in REC mode and P50 for Setting in PLAY mode Propeaten CY O i Making the function button settings for recording You can use assigned functions by pressing a function button when recording e The following functions can be assigned to the button Fn1 Fn2 Fn3 or Fn4 or the icon Fn5 Fn6 Fn7 Fn8 or Fn9 Rec menu Recording functions 3 e Wi Fi P266 Fn3 e Highlight Shadow P132 Fn2 e Q MENU P43 Fn1 e i Dynamic P142 e LVF Monitor Switch P63 Fn4 e i Resolution P142 e AF AE LOCK P159 e HDR P143 e AF ON P159 164 e Electronic Shutter P196 e One Push AE P98 e Flash Mode P219 e Touch AE P171 Ex Tele Conv e Preview P97 Fn5 still pictures motion pictures P211 e Level Gauge P74 Fn6 e Digital Zoom P215 e Focus Area Set P49 e Stabilizer P203 e Zoom Control P210 e Sensitivity P174 e Photo Style P130 e White Balance P134 e Aspect Ratio P139 e AF Mode P146 e Picture Size P139 e Drive Mode P178 e Quality P140 e Restore to Default P49 e Metering Mode P168 Motion Picture menu e Motion Pic Set P228 e Picture Mode P233 Custom m
39. the date will be printed over the stamped text if you specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer e You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in Multi e The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out e Depending on the printer being used some characters may be cut at printing Check before printing e When you stamp pictures in a group the stamped ones are saved separately from the original ones in the group Not available in these cases e You cannot use Text Stamp for the following pictures Motion pictures Pictures taken with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title Pictures that were previously stamped with Text Stamp Pictures taken with RAW RAW or RAW 293 2 Video Divide Recorded motion picture can be divided in two It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need Dividing a motion picture is permanent Decide before you divide 1 Select the menu ey Playback Video Divide 2 Press lt gt to select the motion picture to divide and then press MENU SET Go Press A at the location to divide e Motion picture is played back from the same location when A is pressed again e You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing lt gt while the motion picture is paused 4 Press V e Confirmati
40. to malfunction Also be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window e When there is dirt water oil and fingerprints etc on the surface of the lens the picture may be affected Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft dry cloth before and after taking pictures e Do not place the lens mount facing downwards Do not allow the lens mount contacts Q to become dirty 373 2 Battery s CY The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery Its ability to generate power comes from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it This reaction is susceptible to the surrounding temperature and humidity If the temperature is too high or too low the operating time of the battery will become shorter Always remove the battery after use e Place the removed battery in a plastic bag and store or keep away from metallic objects clips etc If you drop the battery accidentally check to see if the body of the battery and the terminals are damaged e Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera Bring charged spare batteries when going out e Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions such as at a ski resort e When you travel do not forget to bring the battery charger supplied so that you can charge the battery in the country that you are travelling in Dispose of unusable battery e The battery has a limited life e Do not t
41. will only delete the login ID Exit the menu after it is executed Select Next e The login ID is deleted and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed Select OK e Exit the menu after it is executed e Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the camera 299 Wi Fi NFC Configuring the external AV device settings a Preparations aS Images can be sent to the AV device of relatives and acquaintances via LUMIX CLUB Check the address number 16 digit number and access number 4 digit number of the 5 destination AV device issued by LUMIX CLUB Y7 Refer to the AV device instruction manual for details 1 Select the menu UIN Setup Wi Fi Wi Fi Setup External AV device Select Add new device Enter the address number Enter the access code Enter any name A maximum of 28 characters can be entered A two byte character is treated as two characters e Exit the menu after it is set Qi AR UN e Refer to Entering Text P61 for information on how to enter text i Change or delete information on registered AV device Information on AV device that has already been saved can be changed or deleted 1 Select the menu 2 Select the AV device you want to change or delete 3 Select Edit or Delete Item Description of settings Change information on AV device that has already
42. 2 1 Select the menu CA Playback Stop Motion Video 2 Select the Stop Motion Animation group with lt gt and then press MENU SET 3 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it e The steps are the same as those for creating a motion picture following the recording of Stop Motion Animation Refer to step 8 onwards on P193 for details Also refer to the notes on P194 for created motion pictures e If only one picture was taken with Stop Motion Animation the picture cannot be selected 256 vu Playback Editing To allow easy posting to web pages attachment to e mail etc picture size number of pixels is reduced 1 Select the menu Wa Playback Resize Single Multi 2 Select the picture and size Single setting Press lt P gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET Press A to select the size and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed Multi setting Press A to select the size and then press MENU SET Press A V lt P to select the picture and then press MENU SET to set repeat e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again Press lt to select OK and then press MENU SET to execute e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed
43. AE to achieve a suitable exposure setting Yy a How to tell if the exposure is not adequate e lf the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed halfway e If the Manual Exposure Assistance is anything other than 4 7 8000 Tini 200 O when in Manual Exposure mode For more details on Manual Exposure Assistance refer to P95 1 Seta function button to One Push AE P47 e The following step is an example in which One Push AE is assigned to Fn1 2 When exposure is not adequate Press Fn1 Ss Uo w 1 78000 Js 0 D minul o0 e The exposure meter is displayed and the aperture and shutter speed are changed to give a suitable exposure Which items of the settings change will depend on the Recording Mode Recording Mode Settings that change A Aperture value S Shutter speed M Aperture value Shutter speed e In the following cases suitable exposure cannot be set Exposure meter is displayed When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure by changing the aperture value or shutter speed When recording using the flash In Preview Mode P97 When using a lens that includes an aperture ring e In Programme AE Mode Programme Shift can be cancelled by pressing the function button to which One Push AE has been set Recording Modes fo Taking Pictures that match the Scene being recorded Scene Guide Mo
44. CO U Connecting to other equipment E Other linked operations Turning this unit off If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off this unit is also turned off Automatic input switching e If you connect with an HDMI mini cable and then turn this unit on and then press the input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit s screen If the TV s power is in standby status it will turn on automatically if Set has been selected for the TV s Power on link setting e Depending on your TV s HDMI connection on some TV s it may be necessary to manually select the HDMI connection you are using In this case use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel For details on how to switch input please read the operating instructions for the TV If VIERA Link does not work properly refer to P368 e lf you are unsure whether or not the TV you are using is compatible with VIERA Link read the operating instructions for the TV e Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV are different depending on the types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link Refer to the operating instructions of the TV for the operations are supported on the TV e Be sure to use a cable that is HDMI certified e HDMI Mode for this unit is determined automatically when the VIERA Link is operating OO ue CO Connecting to other equipment 4 You can
45. Clear Retouch cccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 OAM iia Ste eae E ene et ae eee ne ee eee AE E EAEE ee 250 SE SLAIN secon cts eee eee rsee ci eee einen a deerueeueenaienan eerste 251 Vid COIDIVI Ge seek a8 nS Dee ay ee eee eee 254 imelaps Videolar eee sere ee ee Neen 255 S _ o SIO p MOTO MIG Oli er tennant cn ns ane Gta 256 a RESIZE ee ne ee ee ee ee eee 25 h SICrOpPPINII a a a E crea E a cage 258 Rotate Rotate DISD a a a ee ee eee eee 259 SEVO e TEE a A E E a E E E E E A E 260 N7 APG E E T A A A T er E ee 261 Prote UE ccc E A E E E E E meena 263 5 SFe Re Ed pene eee eee een es ne eee ee 264 a Delete Combination eee e e e ee eat 264 Wi Fi NFC Wi Fi function NFC function saassaesnunneunnennnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 265 What you can do with the Wi Fi function ss sssssssssnnnusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 268 Controlling with a Smartphone Tablet ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneeees 269 e Installing the smartphone tablet app Panasonic Image App 269 Connecting to a smartphone tablet cccccsssseececseseeeeseseeesseseeeessenees 270 e Taking pictures via a smartphone tablet remote recording 0008 274 e Saving images Stored in the CAMETA cccccseseececeeseececneseeessaeeeeessaners 274 e Sending images in the camera tO AN SNS ccccececeeeee
46. Comp Applicable modes P A S M When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics you can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected CAm Rec Shading Comp Settings ON OFF e This feature may be automatically disabled depending on the recording conditions e Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity T2 Not available in these cases e Correction is not possible in the following cases When recording motion pictures Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture only when set to gg motion picture priorities When Burst Rate is set to SH e Depending on the lens used Shading Comp may not operate Refer to the website for compatible lenses Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 O Setting the colour space Color Space Applicable modes P A S M 5 Set this when you want to correct the colour reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC printer etc O CAm Rec Color Space Settings Description of settings SRGB Colour space is set to sRGB colour space This is widely used in computer related equipment Colour space is set to AdobeRGB colour space AdobeRGB AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colours than sRGB e Depending on the colour space setting the file n
47. Control Mode When recording motion pictures i Face Settings You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to 6 people Registration can be facilitated by taking multiple face images of each person up to 3 pictures registration E Point of recording when registering the face images e Face front with eyes open and mouth closed making sure the Good example for outline of the face the eyes or the eyebrows are not covered registering with hair when registering e Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when registering Flash will not flash during registration E When face is not recognised during recording e Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors or with different expressions or angles P200 e Additionally register at the location of recording e When a person who is registered is not recognised correct by re registering e Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for registered faces depending on the facial expression and environment Press A V to select MEMORY and then press MENU SET Press A V lt P to select the Face Recognition frame that is not registered and then press MENU SET e New will not display if there are 6 people already registered Delete a person already registered to register a new person No 3 Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide e Confirmation screen is
48. EXDOS UKE WIOUG Lorea e nts pen tone aur oer ee maaien aie onan ee nae Sa aeons 235 ed es 03 0 ged Mode ME a a een a es ge meee N ee Pen earn ere N 235 SICONDU S AF ienee a E a eee em ieee cases 235 Rec an 3 C6 Ana E a a N E eeee eeeeee 236 STEX TEIE CONV e a a one ece Ssweee amas ceee as peed ateseee aoe 236 SEIKI IDS ChE AS Cl ae ta Wises ee sees Mice as eal at a acces Set ene is eae ae 236 e SileMmeO Me atl Onn ees seas a ee gat eee acres eee erence ate entree E crater 236 eic IG VC IDES 0 Iert connec i Soret E ete ete en irae een reas ceed 237 Vic evel A 6 eee er a a a eee 237 SVIRA CCE e Se een ee oe E ae eee 237 Playback Editing Switching the Playback Method cccccessseeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeenseesesseeeseees 238 e Displaying multiple screens Multi Playback cccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 e Displaying Pictures by Recording Date Calendar Playback 0 239 Plavno Back Group PICUIES E memes e ascidian coiaee nts nel noct ere 240 HADNA Screens eetee ae ete eae ee eterna Garena A ie et Garena ene ace 241 ASAS SNOW e eaa a na ae ca a Ia ee ey ee 242 BlaybD ck Model ee eee etme ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee 245 Using Playback Bu nCuOns 222220552 sec ast a coe ese cae sane 246 e Creating Still Pictures from a Motion PiCture cccccceeceeeseeeeseeeeesaeeees 246 SOC ATIO hi HOGG ING eee reas eae eee ee eee ee eae an era teen an 247 e Removing unnecessary parts
49. Favorite Item Description of settings Select a destination from Connects with the same settings as the previous ones History Select a destination from i Connects with settings registered as favourites Favorite 3 Select item Register to Favorite Set me a a ooo Registering records as favourites Press Wi Fi Select Select a destination from History Select the item you want to register to favourites and then press P Enter a registration name e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 e A maximum of 30 characters can be entered A two byte character is treated as two characters WG b 305 pwiemro CY O i Editing the items registered to favourites 1 Press Wi Fi 2 Select Select a destination from Favorite 3 Select the favourite item you want to edit and then press P 4 Select the item gt Item Description of settings Remove from Favorite Change the Order in Select the destination Favorite e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Change the Registered Text section on P61 Name e A maximum of 30 characters can be entered A two byte character is treated as two characters O Save frequently used Wi Fi connection settings as favourites The number that can be saved in the history is limited We recommend that you save frequently used Wi Fi connection settings by registering them as fav
50. Fi connection Terminates the Wi Fi connection and allows you to select a different Wi Fi connection Change Settings for Sending Refer to P308 for details Images Change the Destination Registering the current connection destination or the connection method you can easily connect with the same connection method next time Network Address Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit Register the Current Destination to Favorite This is not displayed when the destination of Remote Shooting amp View Playback on TV or Send Images Stored in the Camera is set to Printer 266 u Wi Fi NFC G E Describing method In these operating instructions steps for setting a menu item are described as follows Mi New Connection gt Remote Shooting amp View When select Smartphone etc is described in a step perform any of the following operations Button operation Select Smartphone with the cursor PC button and then press MENU SET Cloud Sync Service Touch operation Touch Smartphone Web service e The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection e Use a IEEE802 11b IEEE802 11g or IEEE802 11n compatible device when using a wireless access point e We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security e It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images e When the battery indicator
51. Fine 5 i Adjustment P137 ar Pa 7202 gnen Ao LE A RAB m Teeth White Balance P134 WB 5 SK O o Colour P88 Number of recordable AF area P65 153 R pictures P36 Spot metering target P168 E Available recording time Oz Self timer P186 R8m30s P231 Ae Mic level display P237 Touch tab P17 CQ Silent Mode P195 Touch tab 4 P17 49 AEL AE Lock P164 Touch tab 4 P17 88 OO CI Metering Mode P168 g Touch tab 4 P17 115 PZ Programme Shift P91 Touch tab 4 P17 110 1 7 Aperture value P65 a Touch tab P17 127 60 Shutter speed P65 O Exposure compensation value E ter P90 P166 o meter 0 Brightness P87 Focal distance display P214 Manual Exposure Assistance TEP ZOORNIMA T P95 ea ISO sensitivity P174 1 This is displayed during countdown 2 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time with the Remaining Disp setting in the Custom menu 3 m is an abbreviation for minute and s for second x4 Only displayed in the monitor 336 u Others M e Only displayed in the monitor Touch zoom P216 Ga One point colour P123 AIEN Touch Shutter P67 Ea Position of the light source P124 fF H Touch AE P171 Creative control adjustment P115 Peaking P160 E P
52. Input and enter the computer name of the PC NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers 4 Select the folder you want to send When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 5 Take pictures e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 You cannot change the settings while sending pictures Wait until sending is complete 287 aS D 2 Wi Fi NFC 1 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera Select the menu KLA New Connection gt Send Images Stored in the Camera gt PC Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 Select the PC you want to connect to e When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed select Manual Input and enter the computer name of the PC NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers Select the folder you want to send e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 Select Single Select or Multi Select e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 Single Select setting Select the picture Select Set Multi Select setting Select the picture repeat e The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected again Select OK The number of pictures that can be sent by Multi Select is limited e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e Folders
53. P307 Preparations e Install the Image App in advance P269 Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording P278 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera P279 e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract 211 Wi Fi NFC O Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While N Recording 1 Select the menu EA Mi New Connection Send Images While Recording Smartphone 5 2 Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 On your smartphone tablet When connecting with Via Network Turn on the Wi Fi function Select the wireless access point you want to connect to and set Start Image App P269 When connecting with Wi Fi Direct or WPS Connection in Direct Start Image App P269 When connecting with Manual Connection in Direct Turn on the Wi Fi function Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit and then enter the password Start Image App P269 3 Select a device you want to connect e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Take pictures e The pictures are sent automatically after taking them To chan
54. P73 and then taking the picture It may result in a better quality picture Ex Tele Conv e Refer to P211 for details Fikr Decrease Applicable modes P A S M The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture Settings 1 50 1 60 1 100 1 120 OFF Silent Operation e Refer to P127 for details 236 O B Motion Picture Mic Level Disp Applicable modes P A s Msn cca nA Set whether or not the mic levels are displayed on the recording screen Settings ON OFF Not available in these cases e Not available with Miniature Effect in Creative Control Mode Mic Level Adj Applicable modes lP A s M em c1 c2 c3 s Adjust the sound input level to 4 different levels T2 Not available in these cases e Not available with Miniature Effect in Creative Control Mode Wind Cut Applicable modes P A s Msn c1 c2 c3 s This prevents the recording of wind noise automatically Settings AUTO HIGH STANDARD LOW OFF e Setting Wind Cut may alter the usual sound quality T2 Not available in these cases e Not available with Miniature Effect in Creative Control Mode 237 Playback Editing Switching the Playback Method Displaying multiple screens Multi Playback uv Rotate the rear dial left 1 screen 12 screens 30 screens Calendar screen display e It is possible to switch
55. The recorded picture is too bright or dark Check that the exposure is correctly compensated P166 e Is the AE Lock P164 applied incorrectly Multiple pictures are taken at one time Cancel the settings of White Balance Bracket P138 e Is the Burst P179 or Auto Bracket P183 set Set the drive mode to Single P65 e Is the self timer P186 set to Xs The subject is not focused properly e The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera P66 e There is camera shake jitter or the subject is moving slightly P204 e Is Focus Release Priority in the Custom menu set to RELEASE P157 In this case focus may not be achieved even if the focus mode lever is set to AF e Is Shutter AF in the Custom menu set to OFF P156 e Is the AF Lock P164 applied incorrectly 356 fomes CY The recorded picture is blurred The Optical Image Stabiliser is not effective a YS e The shutter speed will become slower and the Optical Image Stabiliser function may not work properly when taking pictures especially in dark places eT We recommend holding the camera firmly with both hands when taking pictures P62 We recommend using a tripod and the self timer P186 when taking pictures with a slow bm shutter speed Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible e Is there any memory remaining on the card The recorded picture looks rough Noise appears on the picture e I
56. Time Lapse Shot interval and the number of pictures and automatically P189 record subjects such as animals and plants as time elapses Stop Motion Animation A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures P191 together Panorama Settings Sets the recording direction and image effect for P109 panorama recording Electronic Shutter The shutter sound can be turned off for recording in a P196 quiet environment To reduce the influence of hand shake the shutter is Shutter Delay released when a specified time period has elapsed P209 since the shutter button was pressed Flash Sets the manner in which the flash works P219 Red Eye Removal Automatically detects red eye caused by the flash and P227 corrects the image data accordingly When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO or iso an ISO Limit Set optimal ISO sensitivity is set with the selected value as P176 an upper limit The ISO sensitivity settings values changes in steps of ISO Increments 4 3 EV or 1 EV P176 Extended ISO ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum ISO125 P177 Long Shtr NR You can eliminate the noise caused by recording with a P144 slower shutter speed If the screen periphery darkens as a result of lens Shading Comp characteristics the brightness in this region will be P144 corrected When the number of pixels is set to anything other than Ex Tele Conv L the Tele effect is increased without degrad
57. You can set up to 999 pictures as favourites e When you set pictures in a group as Favorite the number of your Favorite pictures is displayed on the Favorite icon of the group s top picture T2 Not available in these cases e You cannot use Favorite for the following pictures Pictures taken with RAW 260 v Playback Editing DPOF Digital Print Order Format is a system that allows the user to select which pictures to print how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store For details ask at your photo printing store When you set Print Set for a group pictures the print setting for the number of prints will be applied to every picture in the group 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Print Set Single Multi 2 Select the picture Single setting Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET Multi setting Press A V lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET QO Date 3 Press A V to set the number of prints and then press MENU SET to set e When Multi has been selected Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each picture It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures 999 is displayed on the screen if the total number of prints you set for a group pictures is more
58. a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card e Using the supplied battery e Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on If your lens is not equipped with the Optical Image Stabiliser function set the Optical Image Stabiliser option to ay If your lens is equipped with the Optical Image Stabiliser function set the Optical Image Stabiliser option to Eigi e Recording once every 30 seconds using full flash every second recording e Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery decreases The number of recordable pictures varies depending on the recording interval time If the recording interval time becomes longer the number of recordable pictures decreases For example if you were to take one picture every two minutes then the number of pictures would be reduced to approximately one quarter of the number of pictures given above based upon one picture taken every 30 seconds Preparation a E Recording motion pictures when using the monitor Yy AVCHD Recording with picture quality set to FHD 50i When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used Recordable time Approx 130 min Actual recordable time Approx 65 min When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Recordable time Approx 140 min Actual recordable time Approx 70 min Uu i MP4 Recording with picture quality set to FHD 25p When the interchangeable lens H H020A i
59. acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC e Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera For details refer to the ae operating instructions of your PC 7 lf the computer being used does not support SDXC Memory Cards a message prompting you to format may appear Doing so will cause recorded images to be erased so do not choose to format If the card is not recognised please refer to the below support site http panasonic net avc sdcard information SDXC html E PC that can be used The unit can be connected to any PC capable of recognising a mass storage device e Windows support Windows XP Vista 7 8 e Mac support OS X v10 1 v10 8 O AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or folder e With Windows always import AVCHD motion pictures using PHOTOfunSTUDIO one of the programmes on the CD ROM supplied e With a Mac AVCHD motion pictures can be imported using iMovie 11 However motion pictures recorded with Rec Quality set to FHD 50p in AVCHD AVCHD Progressive cannot be imported For details about iMovie 11 please contact Apple Inc 320 Connecting to other equipment O About the supplied software The supplied CD ROM includes the following software Install the software on to your computer before use e PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9 2 PE Windows XP Vista 7 8 5 This software allows you to manage images
60. adaptor DMW MA2M DMW MASR optional set it to ON 2 Preparation Attaching the Lens Hood When recording into strong backlight irregular reflection may occur within the lens The lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the drop in contrast The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality e The interchangeable lens H H020A does not have a lens hood To attach the lens hood flower shape that came with the interchangeable lens H FS1442A Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure e Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be S bent 1 Align the fitting mark on the short side of the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens 2 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks and align the stop mark 8 on the long side of the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens e When carrying the lens hood can be temporarily attached in the reverse direction Preparation 4 Attaching the Shoulder Strap e We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from dropping 1 Pass the shoulder strap through the shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body a Shoulder strap eyelet Ww Ky D WS IS 2 Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the ring in the direction of the arrow and then pass it through the stopper S NS
61. adjust O Sharpness Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 Item Effect Increases the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture Decreases the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture The picture is sharply defined The picture is softly focused The colours in the picture become vivid The colours in the picture become natural The noise reduction effect is enhanced Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly The noise reduction effect is reduced You can obtain pictures with higher resolution Enhances the contrast of an subject Effect Weak The blue sky can be recorded clearly Enhances the contrast of an subject Effect Medium The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue Enhances the contrast of an subject Effect Strong The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue The skin and lips of people and green leaves appear in natural tones Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced Q Contrast Saturation IN Noise Reduction Yellow Orange Filter Effect Displayed only when Monochrome is selected e Registered settings are memorised even if the camera is turned off e If you adjust the picture quality is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen e Colour can be changed by Saturation when Monochrome is selected 3 Press MENU SET E Registering settings to Custom Adjust
62. always delete information such as personal information and wireless LAN connection settings that you have saved within the camera with Reset Wi Fi Settings Delete account P60 299 e Reset the settings to protect the personal information P59 e Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair e Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired e Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations are not possible due to malfunction When transferring to another party or disposing of the memory card please refer to Notice for when transferring to another party or disposing of the memory card P376 When uploading images on web services e Images may contain information that can be used for identifying individuals such as titles recording dates and location information When uploading images on web services check carefully and then upload 377 2 s CY i When not using the camera for a long period of time e Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature Recommended temperature 15 C to 25 C 59 F to 77 F Recommended humidity 40 RH to 60 RH e Always remove the battery and the card from the camera e f the battery is left inserted in the camera it will discharge even if the camera is turned off If the battery continues to be left in the camera it will discharge excessively and may become unusabl
63. are set to be sent The location information will not be deleted from the original images stored in this unit You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs out of free space ON Do not send images OFF Delete images from the oldest ones then send new images x1 Only available when the destination is set to Web service k2 Only available when the destination is set to PC 3 Only available when Send Images Stored in the Camera is selected and the destination is set to Cloud Sync Service Web service or External of AV device x4 Only available when the destination is set to Cloud Sync Service 308 u Wi Fi NFC 4 Wi Fi Setup Menu Configure the settings required for the Wi Fi function The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi Fi Select the menu CAN Setup Wi Fi Wi Fi Setup Desired item to be set LUMIX CLUB Acquires or changes the LUMIX CLUB login ID e Refer to P295 for details You can set the workgroup To send images to a PC a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required The default setting is WORKGROUP Change Workgroup Name PC Connection Enter the workgroup of the connecting PC Exit the menu after it is set Restore to Default Restores the default state Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e For
64. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories e HDMI the HDMI Logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e HDAVI Control is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation e Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries e iMovie Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc e Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries 379 e QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc used under license therefrom e Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of OQ Google Inc e The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi Fi QuickTime Alliance e The Wi Fi Protected Setup Mark is a mark of the Wi Fi Alliance e Wi Fi Wi Fi Protected Setup Wi Fi Direct WPA and WPA2 are marks or registered marks of the Wi Fi Alliance e DLNA the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks service marks or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance e This product uses DynaFont from DynaComware Corporation DynaFont is a registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc e Other names of sys
65. at which the subject is in focus may differ slightly from the rated distance e When using a Leica lens mount adaptor set Shoot w o Lens P23 to ON amp 2 Bewese CY i About the lens and functions There are functions that cannot be used or the operation may be different depending on the lens used Auto Focus Auto aperture setting Eye Sensor AF P64 Defocus control function P86 Stabilizer P203 Touch zoom P216 Shading Comp P144 Quick AF P156 Power Zoom Lens P214 For details on the lens used refer to the website Refer to catalogues Web pages for most current information regarding compatible lenses http panasonic jp support global cs dsc This Site is English only e The available flash range etc differs depending on the aperture value of the lens you are using e The focal length noted on the lens in use is equivalent to double when converted to the 35 mm film camera It will be equivalent to 100 mm lens when a 50 mm lens is used Refer to the website for details about the 3D interchangeable lens u Preparation Changing the Lens By changing the lens you will increase your picture taking options and further your enjoyment of the camera Change the lens using the following procedure e Check that the camera is turned off e Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust Refer to P372 when dirt or dust gets on the lens Attaching the lens Preparations
66. automatically turn this unit off automatically switch off the monitor or display in such a way that the power consumption of the monitor is reduced Sleep Mode The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting 10MIN 5MIN 2MIN 1MIN OFF Auto Monitor Off The monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting 5MIN 2MIN 1MIN Live View Mode Sets the monitor to display in such a way that power consumption is reduced NORMAL ECO Economy e Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel Sleep Mode e To turn the monitor on again press any button or touch the monitor e When Live View Mode is set to ECO the image quality on the recording screen may be worse than when it is set to NORMAL but this does not affect the recorded image e When Live View Mode is set to NORMAL the usage time is reduced e When the eye sensor automatic switching P63 is activated Auto Monitor Off is cancelled e Economy does not work in the following cases When connecting to a PC or a printer When recording or playing back motion pictures During a slide show Multi Exp Time Lapse Shot e When using the AC adaptor optional Sleep Mode is disabled e When using the AC adaptor optional Auto Monitor Off is fixed to 5MIN and Live View Mode
67. becomes out of flash range Check the distance to the subject when taking a picture The distance at which light from the flash is blocked by lens and the distance to which light from the flash is delivered vary depending on the lens used When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used Available flash range AUTO in Sensitivity 50 cm 1 6 feet to 11 7 m 38 feet vue Stabiliser Zoom and Flash When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Available flash range AUTO in 50 cm 1 6 feet to 5 7 m 19 feet 30 cm 0 98 feet to 3 5 m 11 feet Sensitivity e The available flash range is an approximation e This is the range when ISO Limit Set P176 is set to OFF Using the flash skilfully e When recording with the flash white saturation can occur if the subject is too close If Highlight of the Custom menu is set to ON regions of white saturation will blink black and white when you play back or use Auto Review In this case we recommend that you adjust Flash Adjust P223 in the minus direction and record the pictures again e When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached the lower portion of the photo may turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be obscured by the lens hood We recommend detaching the lens hood e Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated The objects may be deformed
68. between brightness setting operation P87 Defocus Control operation and normal operation e Each time the rear dial is pressed in Intelligent Auto Mode the camera switches between Defocus Control operation and normal operation 2 Set the blurriness by rotating the rear dial 4 20 28 40 56 8 0 kani Strong defocus Weak defocus 3 Record pictures or motion pictures E When operating the touch screen Touch gi Touch le to display the setting screen Drag the exposure meter to set the blurriness e Press MENU SET to end the Defocus Control operation Recording Modes O e Pressing 1 6 on the blurriness setting screen will cancel the setting SY eIn Intelligent Auto Mode f or f Auto Focus Mode is set to The position of the AF area can be set by touching the screen Its size cannot be changed e Depending on the lens used you may hear a sound from the lens when the Defocus Control is used but this is due to operation of the aperture of the lens and it is not a malfunction e Depending on the lens used operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded during the recording of a motion picture when the function is used Not available in these cases e Depending on the lens used Defocus Control function may not operate Refer to the website for compatible lenses Recording images by changing the brightness or colour tone Recording Mode This mo
69. destination in World Time the pictures are displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback 239 v Peyoasweatno CC Playing Back Group Pictures A picture group consists of multiple pictures You can play back pictures in a group either continuously or one by one a A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Burst Mode with the burst speed SH P179 a Sil A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse Shot P189 a OI A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop Motion Animation P191 e You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once For example if you delete a picture group all pictures in the group are deleted e Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock 240 O 2 Prybacetatg CY i Continuously playing back Group Pictures Select a picture with the group picture icon 4 i 49 4W and then press A e The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon a a a e When playing back group pictures one at a time options are displayed From the first picture Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group From the current picture Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back E Operations during Group Pictures playback Continuous playback Stop s Rewind Forward while pausing
70. details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 e lf you are using the PC with standard settings you do not need to change the workgroup You can change the name of this unit 1 Press DISP 2 Enter the desired device name Device Name e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 A maximum of 32 characters can be entered Images can be sent to the AV device of relatives and acquaintances via LUMIX CLUB e Refer to P300 for details External AV device Configures the settings for the NFC function ON NFC function is worked OFF NFC Operation 309 u Wi Fi NFC Sets the camera operation after the connection with the NFC function is complete ON When a Wi Fi connection is complete by using the NFC function during single picture playback the single picture can be transferred OFF Touch Sharing To prevent incorrect operation or use of the Wi Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information it is recommended that you protect the Wi Fi function with a password Setting a password will automatically display the password input screen when the Wi Fi function is used Wi Fi Password Setup Enter any 4 digit numbers as the password Exit the menu after it is set Delete Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu af
71. e The slide bar is displayed 3 Perform zoom operations by dragging the slide bar e The zoom speed varies depending on the touched position Y Zooms slowly AVI Zooms quickly e Touch ES again to end touch zoom operations e When Step Zoom P214 is set to ON the slide bar for step zoom is displayed u Stabiliser Zoom and Flash 4 Taking pictures by using the flash Applicable modes f 7 P A S M E Open Close the built in flash Taking a picture using the flash becomes possible by opening the built in flash a To open the flash Slide the flash open lever To close the flash Press the flash until it clicks e Make sure to close the built in flash when it is not in use e The flash setting is fixed to while the flash is closed e Be careful when opening the flash as the flash will jump out e Be careful not to catch a finger when closing a flash bulb O Forcing the flash off When the flash is closed or pictures cannot be taken with the flash due to motion picture recording etc forced flash off is displayed on the recording screen and the flash will not fire e Close the flash in places where its use is prohibited so that it will not fire E The available flash range If the distance to the subject is close when taking a picture using a flash part of the recorded image becomes dark because the light of flash is blocked by the lens or it
72. external flash eIn Intelligent Auto fA or fi Mode shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene E Available flash settings by Recording Mode The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode O Available Not available Initial setting of Scene Guide Mode Intelligent Auto Mode Ee ee ad Intelligent Auto Plus Mode e a S Programme AE Mode ojojo o Aperture Priority AE Mode LO Ol Oy Shutter Priority AE Mode pa Oe Manual Exposure Mode EJEDE Creative Video Mode EE Creative Control Mode _ 1 x3 Cannot be set using the Rec menu i4 is set when the flash is opened P84 klz wm gt 0 8 8 O O O O CO OC CO CO 220 vu Stabiliser Zoom and Flash e a lt O OC OC O OC OC OC Oj 0 ol oig Clear Portrait Silky Skin Backlit Softness Clear in Backlight Relaxing Tone Sweet Child s Face Distinct Scenery Bright Blue Sky Romantic Sunset Glow Vivid Sunset Glow Glistening Water SCN Clear Nightscape Scene Guide l oE Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Clear Night Portrait Soft Image of a Flower Appetizing Food Cute Dessert Freeze Animal Motion Clear Sports Shot Monochrome Panorama Shot e The flash setting may change if the Recording Mode is changed Set the flash setting again if necessary e The f
73. flash set the following from Flash 224 amp 2 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Wireless Channel Select the channel that corresponds to the channel of the external flash you want to control Settings 1CH 2CH 3CH 4CH Wireless FP During wireless recording an external flash fires an FP flash high speed repetition of flash firing This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed Settings ON OFF Communication Light Set the communication light level for wireless recording Settings HIGH STANDARD LOW Wireless Setup e Press the DISP button to fire a test flash a Firing Mode Flash output A Group Luminosity ratio B Group C Group Item Description of settings Firing Mode TTL The camera automatically sets the output of the built in Built in flash Flash OFF The built in flash fires only a signal flash Flash Adjust The output of the built in flash is set manually 229 LY Item ar 2D External Flash A Group B Group C Group Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d Description of settings Firing Mode TTL The camera automatically sets the output of the external flash AUTO Flash output is set by the external flash MANUAL Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash manually OFF The external flash fires only a signal flash Flash Adjust Set the output of the external flash manually when Fi
74. if you wish to pass around dubbed content In this case the content will be played back in standard rather than high definition picture quality 1 Connect this unit with the recording equipment with an AV cable optional 2 Start the playback of this unit 3 Start the recording on the recording equipment e When ending the recording copying stop the playback on this unit after stopping the recording on recording equipment Yellow to the video input socket White to the audio input socket a AV cable optional e When you play back motion pictures on 4 3 aspect ratio TV you must set TV Aspect P57 on this unit to 4 3 before starting a copy The image will be vertically long if you play back motion pictures copied with 16 9 setting on a 4 3 aspect TV e Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable DMW AVC1 optional e See the operating instructions for the recording equipment for details about copying and playing back 325 vu Connecting to other equipment 4 Printing the Pictures If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge you can select the pictures to be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera s monitor e Grouped pictures are displayed individually e Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera For details refer to the operating instructions of your printer Preparations Turn on the camera and the printer
75. in some cases The major messages are described below as examples This picture is protected Delete the picture after cancelling the protect setting P263 Some pictures cannot be deleted This picture cannot be deleted e This feature can only be used with pictures that comply with the DCF standard Perform formatting P60 on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc Cannot be set on this picture e Title Edit Text Stamp or Print Set cannot be set for pictures not based on the DCF standard Memory Card Error Format this card e t is a format that cannot be used with this unit Insert a different card Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc P60 Data will be deleted Lens not found or shoot w o lens in Custom menu is set to off e When using a Leica lens mount adaptor DMW MA2M DMW MASR optional set Shoot w o Lens P23 to ON in the custom menu The lens is not attached properly Do not push lens release button while lens is attached e Detach the lens once and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button P22 Turn this unit on again and if it is still displaying contact the dealer Lens attachment failed Please make sure the lens is attached correctly e Detach the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the camera body using a dry cotton swab Attach the lens turn this unit
76. in the Calendar Playback e Is the clock in the camera set properly P38 e Images edited on a PC or images recorded on other cameras might display a different date to the recorded date during the Calendar Playback White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture e lf you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors white round spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting of particles of dust in the air This is not a malfunction A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots and their position differ in every picture Thumbnail is displayed appears on the screen e ls it a picture that has been recorded with other equipment In such cases these pictures may be displayed with a deteriorated picture quality Red part of the recorded image has changed colour to black e When Red Eye Removal S is in operation if you take a picture of a subject with red colour surrounded by a skin tone colour that red part may be corrected to black by the Red Eye Removal function It is recommended to take a pictures with the flash closed Flash Mode set to or Red Eye Removal set to OFF P227 Motion pictures recorded with this model cannot be played back on other equipment e Motion pictures recorded in AVCHD or MP4 may be played back with poor picture or sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment compatib
77. is displayed while recording still pictures e Recording with the Touch Shutter function P67 is also available E Setting motion picture and still picture priorities Applicable modes PJ A S M Recording method for the still pictures taken while recording a motion picture can be set with Picture Mode in the Motion Picture menu Item Description of settings e Pictures will be recorded with a picture size of S 2 M The picture quality may be different to S 2 M of standard pictures e Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to RAWz z E RAW amp Or RAW When set to RAW still pictures will be recorded Motion picture in Quality of z s priorities e Up to 40 still pictures can be taken during recording of the motion picture e In Miniature Effect of Creative Control Mode there may be a slight delay between fully pressing the shutter button and recording e Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality e The screen will go dark while recording pictures A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period and audio is not recorded e Up to 10 still pictures can be taken during recording of the motion picture To Still picture priorities 233 Motion Picture e The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to 16 9 O Not available in these cases e Simultaneous recording is not possible in the following cases 7
78. is flashing red the connection with other equipment may not start or the connection may be disrupted A message such as Communication error is displayed e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract e Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions If the connection is terminated while sending pictures pictures with missing sections may be sent e Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while sending images e The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service however this will not affect the image being sent 267 u Wi Fi NFC a What you can do with the Wi Fi function What you can do Controlling with a Smartphone Tablet Recording with a smartphone Saving images stored in the camera Sending images to an SNS O Easy connection easy transfer You can use easily by pressing and holding Wi Fi or by using the NFC function E Displaying pictures on a TV P280 P281 When sending images to AV device j You can send pictures and motion pictures to AV devices in your house home AV devices You can also send them to the devices P282 external AV devices of your family or friends living away from you via LUMIX CLUB yE When sending images to PC P285 Using Web services You ca
79. is in use Propeaten CY O i Making the function button settings for playback You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function i k button during playbac e The following functions can be assigned to the button Fn1 Fn3 or Fn4 Playback Menu Playback functions 3 e Favorite P260 Fn1 e Delete Single P80 e Print Set P261 e Off Fn3 Fn4 Protect P263 e Restore to Default x Function button settings at the time of purchase e When Restore to Default is set function button settings return to the default configuration E Using the function buttons during playback Example When Fn1 is set to Favorite Press lt gt to select the picture Press Fn1 and then set the image as Favorite e When assigning Print Set set the number of pictures to be printed next e When assigning Delete Single select Yes on the confirmation screen Preparation 4 Configuring basic settings of this unit Setup Menu l For details on how to select the Setup menu settings refer to P40 A Clock Set and Economy are important items Check their settings before using them Clock Set e Refer to P38 for details 2 Set the time in your home area and travel destination You can display the local times at the travel destinations and record them on the pictures you take e Set Home first thing after purchasing Desti
80. is not a malfunction e Before removing the card or battery turn the camera off and wait until the status indicator has gone off completely Otherwise this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself D may be damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost u Preparation OO O O Y About the Card About cards that can be used with this unit The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit These cards are indicated as card in the text Remarks e SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards can be used only with their compatible devices e Check that the PC and other equipment are compatible when using the SDXC Memory Cards SD Memory Card 8 MB to 2 GB SDHC Memory Card http panasonic net avc sdcard information SDXC html 4 GB to 32 GB e This unit is compatible with UHS I standard SDHC SDXC memory cards SDXC Memory Card e Only the cards with capacity listed left can be used 48 GB 64 GB E About the motion picture recording and SD speed class Confirm the SD Speed Class the speed standard regarding continuous writing on a card label etc when you record a motion picture Use a card with SD Speed Class with Class 4 or more for AVCHD MP4 motion picture recording i cLass e Please confirm the latest information on the following website http panasonic jp support global cs dsc This Site is English only Access to the card The access indi
81. it cannot be connected e Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state e The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave condition gt Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point e It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access point Check the settings of the wireless access point e The wireless access point may not be found depending on the radio wave condition Perform the Manual Connection P303 e Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast Enter and set the network SSID P303 e Try the following Move this unit closer to the wireless access point Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point Change the direction of this unit 364 O 2 s CY It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone tablet e It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi Fi connection setting of the smartphone tablet but it is not a malfunction This unit is not displayed in the Wi Fi setting screen of the smartphone tablet It takes time to setup the connection From the Wi Fi setting menu on the smartphone tablet turn off and then on the Wi Fi function have forgotten the login ID or password for the LUMIX CLUB e Check the information in the lo
82. on again and if it is still displaying contact the dealer Lens not detected Please turn camera on again e This is displayed when the lens has stopped operating normally due to being pressed on by a hand etc gt Turn the camera off and on If the message persists contact the dealer or Panasonic vu s CY Memory Card Error Memory card parameter error This memory card cannot be used Use a card compatible with this unit P34 e SD Memory Card 8 MB to 2 GB e SDHC Memory Card 4 GB to 32 GB e SDXC Memory Card 48 GB 64 GB Insert SD card again Try another card e An error has occurred accessing the card Insert the card again Insert a different card Read Error Write Error Please check the card e lt has failed to read or write data gt Remove the card after turning this unit off Insert the card again turn this unit on and try to read or write the data again e The card may be broken gt Insert a different card Cannot record due to incompatible format NTSC PAL data on this card gt Perform formatting P60 on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc gt Insert a different card Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card e Use a card with SD Speed Class with Class 4 or higher when recording motion pictures e In the event that it stops even after using a Class 4 card or higher the data wri
83. on the playback screen 006 78 Deleting PICEUNGS sire era E Seeenecs 80 S Recording Modes Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function Intelligent Auto Mode maraa aaa aeaa aea aa eaa aiaa raaa a Eeid e 82 e Taking a picture with a blurred background Defocus Control 86 e Recording images by changing the brightness or colour tone 6 87 Taking Pictures with Your Favourite Settings Programme AE Mode 89 Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture SMULICER Speed etree ee eee nec ere trect ann oe ere ears ence tre an ee ee 92 Aperture Pronty AE Mode Tia ea ea eae a e E E ieee ce uses amecna sete ceencs 92 Shutter Priority AE Mode Srk aa terer tnaieane unos slevebencwsanaseey ieeevcunenenvees 93 lt Manual Exposure Modo serosa aene cate cncr anc a 94 e Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed Preview Mode 97 e Easily set aperture shutter speed for suitable exposure One Push AE 98 Taking Pictures that match the Scene being recorded Scene Guilde Mode a aa ana a cones ce A aa cotcauee 99 Taking Pictures with different image effects Creative Control Mode nanana a exc a a a R i 113 Recording motion pictures with manually set aperture value shutter speed Creative Video Mode ccccccesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeneneeeseeeeees 125 e Minimising operational sounds during motion picture recording 127 Registering your preferred settings
84. or 8 may be displayed on the playback screen for a long period of time During this time deletion and use of the Playback menu are not possible e If this unit is turned off while acquiring information only the pictures that have already acquired the information are saved as a group When you switch on again the information retrieval will restart from the same point This battery cannot be used e Use a genuine Panasonic battery If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used contact the dealer or Panasonic e lf the battery terminal is dirty clean it and remove any objects Failed to connect wireless access point Connection failed No destination found e Check following regarding the wireless access point gt The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong Check the authentication type encryption type and encryption key P303 Power of the wireless access point is not turned on Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit e Check the network setting of the destination e Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point Check other devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the 2 4 GHz band No picture to send e This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination Check the file format of the ima
85. pictures using the AC adaptor optional the power supply is cut off due to a power cut or if the AC adaptor optional is disconnected etc the motion picture will not be recorded e It will be recorded in the following categories for certain Recording Modes A motion picture recording matching each Recording Mode will be performed for the ones not listed below Selected Recording Mode mecording coer wae recording motion picture e Programme AE Mode e Aperture Priority AE Mode e Shutter Priority AE Mode e Manual Exposure Mode e Clear in Backlight Scene Guide Mode Portrait Mode e Clear Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Clear Night Portrait Scene Guide Mode Normal motion picture Low Light Mode Not available in these cases e Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases Glistening Water Glittering llluminations Soft Image of a Flower Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Soft Focus Star Filter Sunshine Creative Control Mode When using Time Lapse Shot When using Stop Motion Animation 232 Motion Picture Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures B Applicable modes meP A S M Still pictures can be recorded even while recording a motion picture Simultaneous recording During motion picture recording press the shutter button fully to record a still picture e Simultaneous recording indicator
86. printing it 1 Press lt gt to select the picture and then press O MENU SET z 2 Press A to select Print start and then press MENU SET e Refer to P328 for the items that can be set before starting to print the pictures e Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing I Selecting multiple pictures and printing them 1 Press A 2 Press A F to select an item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Multiple pictures are printed at one time e Press A W lt gt to select the pictures and then press MENU SET When MENU SET is pressed again the setting is cancelled e After the pictures have been selected press lt to select OK and then press MENU SET Multi Select Select All Prints all the stored pictures Print Set DPOF Prints the pictures set in Print Set only P261 Favorite Prints the pictures set as favourites only P260 3 Press A to select Print start and then press MENU SET e If the print check screen has appeared select Yes and print the pictures e Refer to P328 for the items which can be set before starting to print the pictures e Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing 327 amp 2 Connecting to other equipment Print Settings Select and set the items both on the screen in step 2 of the Selecting a single picture and printing it and in step 3 of the Selecting multiple pictures and printing them proce
87. recording screen CAT Custom Constant Preview ON OFF e Close the flash e lt can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode e The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ Check the pictures on the playback screen e Rotate the front rear dial to display the Expo Meter Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red e If the exposure is not adequate the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink when the shutter button is pressed halfway e We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow e The Sensitivity is automatically set to ISO200 when you switch the Recording Mode to Manual exposure while the Sensitivity is set to AUTO or iso Intelligent e When you use a lens with an aperture ring the aperture ring setting takes priority Not available in these cases e When the flash is activated the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1 320th of a second 1 250th of a second with an external flash P220 e The shutter speed slower than 1 second is not available when Electronic Shutter is set to ON v Recording Modes d Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed Preview Mode Applicable modes mwl PASM The effects of aperture and shutter speed can be checked by using the Preview Mode e Confirm the effects of aperture You can check the depth of field effective focus range before taking a picture by closing
88. remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating the status indicator blinks and the alarm beeps Disconnect the USB connection cable safely Otherwise data may be destroyed e Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor optional turn the camera off e Before inserting or removing a card turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection cable Otherwise data may be destroyed 323 u Connecting to other equipment E Copying to a PC without using PHOTOfunSTUDIO If you are not able to install PHOTOfunSTUDIO you can copy files and folders to your PC by dragging and dropping files from this unit e The content folder structure on the card of this unit is as follows For Windows A drive Removable Disk is displayed in Computer For Mac A drive INO NAME is displayed on the desktop DCIM Images N DCIM Folder number mil 100 PANA Colour space P sRGB o _ AdobeRGB P1000001 JPG O Pie number o e KJ O JPG Still pictures P1000002 JPG MP4 MEA MONON pictures RW2 Pictures in RAW files P1000999 JPG MPO 3D pictures te MISC DPOF print 999 PANA Favourite mil MISC AVCHD AVCHD Motion pictures PRIVATE AVCHD e AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or folder We recommend using PHOTOfunSTUDIO on the CD ROM supplied for importing files Refer to P320 for details A new folder is creat
89. second picture and subsequent pictures may be brighter or darker When the burst speed is set to H when the Focus mode is AFF or AFC M or L they are adjusted each time you take a picture e Since the shutter speed becomes slower in dark places the burst speed pictures second may become slower e Depending on the operating conditions it may take time to take the next picture if you repeat the recording of pictures e It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card If you take pictures continuously while saving the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases For continuous shooting use of a high speed memory card is recommended Shutter Drive Settings LT Not available in these cases e The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Soft Image of a Flower Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Miniature Effect Soft Focus Star Filter 5 Sunshine Creative Control Mode VS When White Balance Bracket is set When recording motion pictures When recording using the flash When HDR is set to ON Multi Exp When using Time Lapse Shot In Stop Motion Animation only when Auto Shooting is set e In the following cases SH in Burst Mode cannot be used When Quality is set to RAWs s RAW z or RAW When using Stop Motion Animation When usin
90. set the operation of AF AE LOCK button when taking a picture with fixed focus or exposure P164 P165 Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway ii The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway P156 Sets the focus method P147 Speeds up the focusing that takes place when you press the shutter button P156 The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is active P64 Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway with Auto Focus P155 Mode set to AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light i conditions Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor P155 button when recording P161 It will set so no picture can be taken when it is out of P457 focus You can set the focus manually after the automatic ef P157 focus has finished Sets the display method of MF Assist enlarged P159 screen 349 poms CY Ly When you set the focus manually an MF guide that MF Guide allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is P158 displayed am In focus portions are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually P160 Peaking YI Histogram This allows you to set either to display or not display P73 the histogram Th
91. set to NORMAL When flash is used repeatedly e When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging the battery the life of the battery may have expired Buy a new battery Preparation Inserting and Removing the Card optional the Battery E e Check that this unit is turned off e We recommend using a Panasonic card 1 Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow and open the card battery door e Always use genuine Panasonic batteries e If you use other batteries we cannot guarantee the quality of this product 2 Battery Being careful about the battery orientation insert all the way until you hear a locking sound and then check that it is locked by lever Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow to remove the battery Card Push it securely all the way until you hear a click while being careful about the direction in which you insert it To remove the card push the card until it clicks then pull the card out upright Do not touch the connection terminals of the card 3 Close the card battery door Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow Preparation d O e Remove the battery after use The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after SS being charged e The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging The camera also Ee becomes warm during use This
92. setting of the Programme AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially u Registering Personal Menu Settings Registering custom settings To allow recording using the same settings up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using Cust Set Mem C1 C2 C3 1 C3 2 C 3 3 Preparations Set in advance the Recording Mode you wish to save and select the desired menu settings on the camera 1 Select the menu CE Custom Cust Set Mem 2 Press A F to select the custom set to register and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed Custom set Description of settings The settings are registered for C 1 on the mode dial e You can record using by simply rotating the mode dial to the C1 corresponding position If you register the custom settings you use often it is then convenient to use them The settings are registered for C2 on the mode dial e You can record using by simply rotating the mode dial to the C2 corresponding position If you register the custom settings you use often it is then convenient to use them C3 1 The settings are registered for C3 on the mode dial e You can register up to 3 sets of custom settings and use the C3 2 a different sets as condition demand C3 3 VG Recording Modes Recording using registered custom set You can easily call up
93. sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder and pictures are saved in those folders e If the screen for a user account and password entry appears enter the one you set on your PC e When the computer name NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers contains a space blank character etc it may not be recognised correctly If a connection attempt fails we recommend that you change the computer name or NetBIOS name to the one consisting of only alphanumeric characters with a maximum of 15 characters 288 U Wi Fi NFC Using Web services You can send pictures and motion pictures to an SNS etc via LUMIX CLUB By setting up automatic transfers of pictures and motion pictures to the Cloud Sync Service you can receive the transferred pictures or motion pictures on a PC or smartphone LUMIX CLUB gt SCeec5e S A a Wireless access point Web service Cloud Sync Service Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu When sending images to web service P289 When sending images to Cloud Sync Service P293 e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract When sending images to web service E Methods for sending and images that can be sent 3D Sending an image each time a recording is made O Send Images While Recording Sending selected images O Send Imag
94. than 1000 pictures e Exit the menu after it is set u Playback Editing E Cancelling all the Print Set settings Select the menu Say Playback Print Set Cancel e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed E To print the date After setting the number of prints set cancel printing with the recording date by pressing gt e Depending on the photo printing store or the printer the date may not be printed even if you set to print the date For further information ask at your photo printing store or refer to the operating instructions for the printer e The date print feature is disabled for pictures that are stamped with text e The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999 e Depending on the printer the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if this is the case e It may not be possible to use the print settings with other equipment In this case cancel all the settings and reset the settings e When you set pictures in a group to Print Set the number of pictures added to Print Set and the total number of pictures to be printed are displayed on the Print Set icon of the group s top picture Not available in these cases e You cannot use Print Set for the following pictures Motion pictures Pictures taken with RAW File that does not comply with the DCF standard 262 uv
95. the leaf shutter to the aperture value you set e Confirm the effects of shutter speed Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual picture that will be taken with that shutter soeed When the shutter speed is set for high speed display in the shutter speed preview will be displayed like a time release film It is used in cases such as stopping the movement of running water 1 Seta function button to Preview P47 e The following step is an example in which Preview is assigned to Fn5 2 Touch fi 3 Switch the confirmation screen by touching Fn5 e The screen switches each time Fn5 is touched Normal recording screen Effects of Aperture Effects of Shutter Speed O Depth of field properties Aperture value x1 Focus length of the lens Tele Distance to the subject Near O Distant Depth of field effective focus range Shallow Narrow Deep Wide x1 Recording conditions x2 Example When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc x3 Example When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background etc e It is possible to record while in Preview Mode e Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1 1000th of a second Recording Modes 4 Easily set aperture shutter speed for suitable exposure One Push AE O Applicable modes P A s M fsv c1 c2c3 SS When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark you can use one push
96. the playback screen by touching the following icons E 1 screen Tm 12 screens H5 30 screens ca Calendar screen display e The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up or down e Pictures displayed using cannot be played back E To return to Normal Playback Press A V lt gt to select a picture and then press MENU SET 238 u Playback Editing Displaying Pictures by Recording Date Calendar Playback 1 Rotate the rear dial left to display the Calendar screen 2 Press A W lt gt to select the date to be played back SUH Mo VED NED Ue eI a 2 2 APPREPE e if there were no pictures recorded during a month that month is not aie o He ajes IFA ERPREEEE ERA EE Set 3 Press MENU SET to display the images that are recorded in selected date 4 Press A W lt gt to select a picture and then press MENU SET e Rotate the rear dial left to return to the Calendar screen display e The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected when the Calendar screen is first displayed e If there are multiple pictures with the same recording date the first picture recorded on that day is displayed e You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099 e If the date is not set in the camera the recording date is set as the 1st January 2013 e lf you take pictures after setting the travel
97. the speaker with your finger Doing so may make sound difficult to hear Terminal cover e Open the monitor before opening the terminal cover 40 Before Use H H020A H FS1442A LUMIX G 20 mm LUMIX G VARIO 14 42 mm F1 7 I ASPH F3 5 5 6 H ASPH MEGA O I S yN 3 4 Lens surface Focus ring P158 Contact point Lens fitting mark P22 Tele Wide Zoom ring P210 NOOR WD e The interchangeable lens H H020A utilises a lens drive system to realize a compact and bright F1 7 lens As a result sound and vibration may occur during focus operation but this is not a malfunction e Operating sounds will be recorded when auto focus is performed during motion picture recording It is recommended to record with Continuous AF P230 set to OFF if the sound of operation bothers you P68 Also it is not possible to set the Focus Mode to AFC or AFF P147 2 Before Use 4 i Monitor Viewfinder You can adjust the angle of the monitor viewfinder Adjust the angle of the monitor viewfinder e Be careful not to catch your finger etc in the monitor viewfinder e When adjusting the angle of the monitor viewfinder be careful not to apply too much force as this may cause damage or malfunction e When not using this unit close the monitor viewfinder completely back to the original position E Recording from a variety of angles The monitor viewfinder can be rotated to suit your needs
98. tilt to the left Vertical direction Correcting downward tilt e When the tilt of the camera is little the indicator changes to green e When recording with a vertical orientation the display automatically switches to a vertically orientated display e Even after correcting the tilt there may still be an error of approximately 1 e When a function button is set to Level Gauge the tilt sensor display can be switched on off by pressing the function button T2 Not available in these cases e Tilt sensor display may not be displayed correctly when this unit is in motion e When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record the tilt sensor display may not be displayed correctly and the Direction Detection Function P62 may not work correctly U pes CY Playing Back Pictures Motion Pictures Playing Back Pictures 1 Press gt Bi 2 Press lt gt lt Play back the previous picture gt Play back the next picture e If you press and hold lt you can play back the pictures in succession e Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating the front dial or dragging the screen horizontally e You can forward or rewind pictures continuously by keeping your finger on the left or right sides of the screen after forwarding rewinding a picture Pictures are displayed reduced in size e Speed of picture forwarding rewinding changes depending on the playback status Fo Switching the speed fo
99. to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value The exposure is adequate C 0 Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value ron e The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation We recommend checking the pictures on the playback screen 2 ae 0 E About B Bulb If you set the shutter speed to B the shutter stays open while the shutter button is pressed fully up to about 120 seconds The shutter closes if you release the shutter button Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of fireworks a night scene etc If you set the shutter speed to B B is displayed on the screen e When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to B use a sufficiently charged battery P26 e The Manual Exposure Assistance does not appear e This cannot be used when Electronic Shutter is set to ON e It can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode e We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control DMW RSL1 optional when you take pictures with the shutter speed set to B Refer to P333 for information about the shutter remote control e When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to B noise may become visible To avoid picture noise we recommend setting Long Shtr NR in the Rec menu to ON before taking pictures P144 vu Recording Modes Fo Checking not checking the effects of aperture and shutter speed on the
100. to the direction of the battery plug in type inlet type 2 Connect the charger to the electrical outlet e The CHARGE indicator lights up and charging begins 90 F amp 2 Preparation E About the CHARGE indicator The CHARGE indicator turns on The CHARGE indicator is turned on during charging The CHARGE indicator turns off The CHARGE indicator will turn off once the charging has completed without any problem Disconnect the charger from the electrical socket and detach the battery after charging is completed e When the CHARGE indicator flashes The battery temperature is too high or too low It is recommended to charge the battery again in an ambient temperature of between 10 C and 30 C 50 F and 86 F The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty In this case wipe them with a dry cloth E Charging time Charging time _ time Approx 190 min e The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used The charging time for the battery in hot cold environments or a battery that has not been used for a long time may be longer than normal E Battery indication LENN e The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted The status indicator also blinks Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery e Do not
101. 144 5 Vv e Correcting the brightness on the screen periphery Shading Comp 144 e Setting the colour space Color Space c ccccccssececeeseeceeeesseeeeseeeeeees 145 Focus and Exposure Settings Taking Pictures with Auto FOCUS ioeina ee aaa eee aaaea aeaaea eana 146 About the focus mode AFS AFF AFC ccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeees 147 mM ypeor ine Auto FOCUS Mode ree ee eak a eeaeeet enter E ees 149 e Setting the desired focus method cccccsecccsssseececeeseeeessesecesseseeeessenees 156 Taking Pictures with Manual FOCUuS c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeees 158 Fixing the Focus and the Exposure AF AE LOCK ssceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 Compensating the EXOOS Une amenena eea eee EE aE EAEE PAE aaaea ES 166 Selecting the Method for Measuring Brightness Metering Mode 168 Making Multiple Exposures on One Picture MUTED eterna nearer nae anos T nea epi made aah eee ane ene opti E 169 Easily Optimising the Brightness for a Specified Area Touch AE 171 Setting the Light Sensitivity reae te cceese cess ssaemencerscecc sate 174 e Setting the upper limit on ISO Sensitivity cccssseceecesseeeseeseeeesseaees 176 e Setting the step increment of ISO Sensitivity cee ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 SE xtending SO SemSIV ar A venue taaens 177 Shutter Drive Settings Select ai Dive Mode x2
102. 20 available scan lines is used for output 576p 480p The progressive method with 576 480 available scan lines is used for output 1When Video Out is set to PAL 2When Video Out is set to NTSC e This will work when the HDMI mini cable is connected e f the images are not output on the TV when the setting is AUTO match with the image format your TV can display and select the number of effective scanning lines Please read the operating instructions for the TV u Preparation Settings that allow this unit to be controlled by the remote control of the VIERA equipment by automatically coupling this unit with the VIERA Link compatible equipment using HDMI mini cable ON Remote control operation of the VIERA Link VIERA Link compatible equipment is enabled Not all operations are possible Button operation of the main unit will be limited OFF Operation is performed with the buttons on this unit e This will work when the HDMI mini cable is connected e Refer to P318 for details Set the output method for 3D pictures 3D Set when connecting to a 3D compatible television 3D Playback 2D Set when connecting to a television not compatible with 3D Set this when you would like to view pictures in 2D conventional image on a 3D compatible television e This will work when the HDMI mini cable is connected e Refer to P313 for the method to play back 3D pictures in 3D St
103. 231 setting to the mode you wish to record in Not available in these cases e Extra Tele Conversion is not available in the following cases Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Toy Effect Toy Pop Creative Control Mode When Quality is set to RAWs s RAW z or RAW When Burst Rate is set to SH When HDR is set to ON Multi Exp D Y 2 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d Fo Changing the settings for a power zoom lens UA Custom Power Zoom Lens This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom electrically operated zoom The interchangeable lenses H H020A H FS1442A are not compatible with power zoom For compatible lenses please refer to our website Item Disp Focal Length Step Zoom Zoom Resume Zoom Speed Zoom Ring Description of settings When you zoom the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom ET E position a Focal distance indication Current focal distance ON OFF When you operate the zoom with this er ae setting ON the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances Step zoom indication e Step Zoom is disabled during motion picture recording ON OFF When you turn this unit on the zoom positions when you last turned this unit off are automatically restored ON OFF You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations e If you
104. 5 ie te ssa chs sca Se oss ook oc wa csc cae ee ee eee 178 Taking Pictures using Burst MOde ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeueeeseneeeeees 179 Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 183 Taking Pictures with the Self timer c cessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeneeesseaeneeees 186 Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals Time Lapse Shotft 189 Creating Stop Motion Pictures Stop Motion Animation 008 191 Disabling Operational Sounds and the Output of Light at once Silent Mode csccs 2 dee a cece od aa es Gs A es E 195 Taking Pictures with No Shutter Sound Electronice SmuUter ce a eee a eae acts Sees eee ee 196 Taking Clear Pictures by Registering Faces ERAGE ROCOG sy oaa corsets fecetec se cdeaucaces aeeecen yack a sone 197 Recording Profiles of Babies and Pets On IMaQes ceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 202 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Optical Image StabiliSen T a ics sector cere cee errs reese ee coe sess tecouesenece cote cecete sees sagt 203 e Using the Optical Image Stabiliser function of a IENS ccceeeceeee eee 204 e Using the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit eee 206 Minimising vibratiom of theshutter eiae rrera a a E cai uct 209 Taking Pictures with the ZOOM c scccceeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeee
105. 58 Card battery door does not close e Insert the battery securely all the way in P32 The battery becomes flat too quickly e Is a Wi Fi connection being used for a long period of time The battery can become flat quickly when connected to Wi Fi Turn the camera off frequently by using the Economy etc P55 This unit suddenly turns off during recording When the camera is overheating during recording due to a high ambient temperature or continuous recording A flashes If a message is displayed after A flashes the camera will turn off automatically to protect itself If the camera turns off recording will be disabled until it cools down 359 u s CY Taking pictures is not possible The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed e Is the subject focused gt Focus Release Priority is set to FOCUS at the time of purchase and so you cannot take pictures until the subject is in focus If you want to be able to take a picture when you press the shutter button fully even if the subject is not focused set Focus Release Priority in the Custom menu to RELEASE P157 The recorded picture is whitish e Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft dry cloth Refer to P372 when the image sensor gets dirty
106. ENU SET 3 Press A V to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings g Forced Flash On The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording Forced On conditions Red Eye e Use this when your subject is back lit or under fluorescent light gs Slow Sync When taking pictures against a dark background landscape this s Slow Sync feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated Dark Red Eye background landscape will appear brighter e Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark background e Using a slower speed can cause motion blur Using a tripod can enhance your photos x It can be set only when Wireless in Flash is set to OFF and Firing Mode is set to TTL The flash is activated twice The interval between the first and second flash is longer when 4 or s is set The subject should not move until the second flash is activated Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d E Shutter speed for each flash setting Flash setting Shutter speed Sec Flash setting Shutter speed Sec S 1 60 to 1 320th 1 to 1 8000th 60 to 1 8000th 3 x1 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter Priority AE Mode and B Bulb in the Manual Exposure Mode x2 This becomes B Bulb in the Manual Exposure Mode e When the flash is activated the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1 320 of a second 1 250th of a second with an
107. Exposure Settings O e When recording with the Touch Shutter the focus and brightness are optimised for the touched SS position before recording takes place e At the edge of the screen the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched location Not available in these cases 5 e AF AE which optimises the focus and brightness does not work in the following cases In Manual Focus When using the Digital Zoom When the AF area has been set by using the cursor button U Focus and Exposure Settings Setting the Light Sensitivity Applicable modes P A S M em c1 c2 c3 This allows the sensitivity to light ISO sensitivity to be set Setting to a higher figure enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the resulting pictures coming out dark 1 Press A ISO 2 Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the rear dial e You can switch the functions between the rear dial and the front dial by pressing DISP uinir _OFF_ E J Auto Aiso 200 40 3 3 Rotate the front dial to set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity e It will work when the Sensitivity is set to AUTO or fiso 4 Press the rear dial to set vu Focus and Exposure Settings ISO sensitivity Description of settings The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the AUTO brightness e Maximum ISO3200 With the flash on ISO1600 The camera detects movement o
108. F AFC Pinpoint AF Time Focus Release Priority AF MF MF Assist MF Guide Peaking Histogram Guide Line Highlight Constant Preview Dial Guide LVF Custom Disp Style Monitor Disp Style Monitor Info Disp Rec Area Remaining Disp Auto Review Fn Button Set Q MENU Dial Set Video Button Power Zoom Lens Eye Sensor Touch Settings Touch Scroll Menu Guide Shoot w o Lens Setup All menu items can be set P51 Intelligent Auto Mode Menu Item Aspect Ratio Picture Size Burst Rate Self Timer Time Lapse Shot Stop R Rec Motion Animation Face Recog Motion aes iz Refer to Using the Motion Picture Menu on P235 Picture Custom Silent Mode AFS AFF AFC Guide Line Remaining Disp Setup All menu items can be set P51 The Backlight Compensation When there is a backlight the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto Mode backlight compensation works automatically v Recording Modes Taking a picture with a blurred background Defocus Control Recording Mode You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen 1 Press the rear dial to display the setting screen e Each time the rear dial is pressed in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode the camera switches
109. For example you can send pictures and motion 7 pictures to a PC and sort them by recording date or model name You can also perform operations such as writing images to a DVD processing and correcting images and editing motion pictures e SILKYPIX Developer Studio Windows XP Vista 7 8 Mac OS X v10 4 v10 5 v10 6 v10 7 v10 8 This is software to edit RAW format images Edited images can be saved in a format JPEG TIFF etc that can be displayed on a personal computer For details on how to use the SILKYPIX Developer Studio refer to the Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory s support website http www isl co jp SILKYPIX english p support e LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version Windows XP Vista 7 8 LoiLoScope is a video editing software where that draws out the full power of your PC Creating videos is as easy as organizing cards on top of a desk Use your music picture and video files to create videos to share with your friends and family by burning it to a DVD uploading it to websites or simply share your videos with your friends via e mail This will only install a shortcut to the trial version download site For more information on how to use LoiLoScope read the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the link below Manual URL http loilo tv product 20 Connecting to other equipment a E Installing supplied software Yy e Before inserting the CD ROM close all running applications S 1 Chec
110. LED lighting the colour tone or brightness of the image may change or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen In that case change the Recording Mode or manually adjust the shutter speed to 1 60 or 1 100 e You can change the settings during the motion picture recording In that case operating sound may be recorded Use of the Silent Operation is recommended P127 Recording Modes Minimising operational sounds during motion picture recording The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures e Set Silent Operation in the Motion Picture menu to ON B 1 Start recording 2 Touch L a 3 Touch icon Zoom When an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom is used z4 e Aperture value Shutter speed Ea Exposure Compensation D O ISO sensitivity e Mic level adjustment 4 Drag the slide bar to set The speed of the operation varies depending on the position you touch ayy Avy 5 Stop recording changes the setting slowly changes the setting quickly Recording Modes fo Registering your preferred settings Custom Mode Recording Mode You can register the current camera settings as custom settings If you then record in Custom Mode you can use the registered settings e Initial
111. Lapse Shot 2 Press A F to select the item and then press MENU SET Start Time Shooting Interval Image Count End 10 00 1 DEC 2013 Item Description of settings Now Starts the recording by fully pressing the shutter button You can set the time to start recording Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set Select the item hour or minute by pressing lt gt set the start time by pressing A V and then press MENU SET Start Time start Time The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set lt P gt Select the item minute second number of pictures hooti l a saat A V Setting Image MENU SET Set E e A recording interval ranging from 1 second to 99 minutes and 59 seconds can be set at 1 second interval e The number of pictures ranging from 1 to 9999 can be set Press A V to select Start and then press MENU SET 3 O 4 Press the shutter button fully e The recording starts automatically i e During recording standby the power will turn off automatically if no operation is performed 7 for a certain period The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the power turned off When the recording start time arrives the power turns on automatically To turn on the 5 power manually press the shutter button halfway VS If Fn3 is pressed or 9_ is touched while this unit is turned on a selection screen asking you to pause or end will be displayed Oper
112. Miniature Effect you can make the subject stand out by intentionally creating defocused and in focus portions You can set the recording orientation defocus orientation and the position and size of the in focus portion 1 Press Fn2 to display the setting screen e Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of A then J 2 Press A V or lt gt to move the in focus portion e You can also move the in focus portion by touching the screen on the recording screen e Touching FI allows you to set the recording orientation defocus orientation 3 Rotate the rear dial to change the size of in focus portion The portion can also be enlarged reduced by pinching out pinching in P16 the screen e If you press DISP or touch Reset settings for the in focus portions are restored to the initial settings 4 Press MENU SET to set e You can also set by touching Set e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping e No sound is recorded in motion pictures e Approximately 1 8 of the time period is recorded If you record for 8 minutes the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately 1 minute long The displayed available recording time is approximately 8 times When switching to Recording Mode please check the available recording time e When the focus mode lever is set to MF move the in focus portion over a manually focused a
113. NY Exposure Comp Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it si Front Dial Rear Dial OFF Cursor buttons MENU SET button Pressing the cursor button Selection of items or setting of values etc is performed Pressing MENU SET Confirmation of setting contents etc is performed e These operating instructions express the up down left and right of the cursor button as A W lt gt Even when the camera is operated using the touch screen it is possible to operate with the cursor button and MENU SET button if a guide like the one shown on the right is displayed Even on menu screens etc on which the guide is not displayed you can make settings and selections by operating the buttons u Before Use 4 About the Lens E Micro Four Thirds mount specification lens This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with m the Micro Four Thirds System lens mount specification Lee Lee Micro Four Thirds mount MICRO MICRO FOURTHIRDS E Four Thirds mount specification lens Lens with the Four Thirds mount specification can be used by using the mount adaptor DMW MA1 optional My Me FOURTHIRDS E Leica mount specification lens When you use the M mount adaptor or R mount adaptor DMW MA2M DMW MAS3R optional you can use Leica M Mount or Leica R Mount interchangeable lenses e For certain lenses the actual distance
114. Not focusing in advance Dia Custom Quick AF gt ON OFF As long as the camera is held steady the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed This is useful when you do not want to miss a picture taking opportunity e The battery will be consumed faster than usual e Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject e The Quick AF feature is disabled in the following conditions In Preview Mode In low light situations With lenses that only offer Manual Focus With some Four Thirds lenses that do not support contrast AF u Focus and Exposure Settings Fo Turning on not turning on the AF Assist Lamp CAM Custom AF Assist Lamp ON OFF AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed halfway making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions Larger AF area is displayed depending on the recording conditions e The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used When the interchangeable lens H H020A is attached Approx 1 0 m 3 3 feet to 5 0 m 16 feet When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is attached and at Wide Approx 1 0 m 3 3 feet to 3 0 m 9 8 feet e The AF Assist Lamp is valid only for the subject in the centre of the screen Use it by positioning the subject in th
115. P19 A ISO button P174 gt WB White Balance P134 lt 4 AF Mode button P146 Y Drive Mode button P178 The following settings can be made with the Drive Mode button Single P65 Burst P179 Auto bracket P183 Self timer P186 25 DISP button P71 78 e Each time this is pressed the display on the monitor is switched 26 Diopter adjustment lever P63 vu Before Use 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Stereo microphone P237 27 2829 303132 e Be careful not to cover the microphone with your finger Doing so may make sound difficult to record Hot shoe Hot shoe cover P331 Focus distance reference mark P163 Shutter button P65 Front dial P18 Mode dial P69 Motion picture button P231 Status indicator P38 Camera ON OFF switch P38 33 34 35 Tripod mount P378 A tripod with a screw length of 5 5 mm 0 22 inch or more may damage this unit if attached DC coupler cover e When using an AC adaptor ensure that the 36 3738 39 Panasonic DC coupler optional and AC adaptor optional are used P333 Release lever P32 Card Battery door P32 Shoulder strap eyelet P25 e Be sure to attach the shoulder strap when using the camera to ensure that you will not drop it AV OUT DIGITAL socket P316 323 325 326 HDMI socket P315 REMOTE socket P333 Speaker P53 Be careful not to cover
116. P295 and configure the Cloud Sync setting to send a picture to a Cloud Folder Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording P294 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera P294 E About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of Cloud Sync Service As of August 2013 To send images to a Cloud Folder Cloud Sync setting is required Configure the settings on aPC with PHOTOfunSTUDIO or on a smartphone tablet with Image App e If you set the picture destination to Cloud Sync Service sent pictures are temporarily saved in the cloud folder and they can be synchronised with the device in use such as the PC or smartphone tablet e A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days up to 1000 pictures Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer Furthermore when the number of stored images exceeds 1000 some images may be deleted depending on the Cloud Limit P308 setting even within 30 days after the transfer e When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is complete images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the transfer 293 U G N pwiemro CY Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording 1 Select the menu Mi New Connection Send Images While Recordi
117. P53 Monitor Display Brightness colour or red or blue tint of the Monitor n gn i P53 Viewfinder viewfinder is adjusted Set the monitor brightness to suit the amount of Monitor Luminance surrounding light P54 Suppresses the unit s power consumption to prevent Economy the battery from being run down mas Sets the communication method when connecting 0S8 Mode using the USB connection cable supplied pam Output This sets how the unit connects to a television etc P57 VIERA Link Equipment that supports the VIERA Link will connect P58 automatically 3D Playback Set the output method for 3D pictures P58 Menu Resume Stores the location of the last used menu item for each P58 menu Menu Background Set the background colour for the menu screen P42 Descriptions of menu items or their settings are Menu niermaten displayed on the menu screen g QI fo 352 Set the language displayed on the screen This enables the firmware versions of the camera and Version Disp lens to be checked An exposure value can be reset when the recording ee ode is changed or the camera is turned off U Sets whether or not to cancel the self timer when this Se ee nit is turned off Returns the image file number to 0001 The recording or setup custom settings are reset to the Reset all settings in the Wi Fi menu to factory default Reset Wi Fi Settings settings excluding LUMIX CLUB
118. Pinpoint AF Time LONG Approx 1 5 seconds MID Approx 1 0 second SHORT Approx 0 5 second Fo Moving not moving the AF area with the cursor button Way Custom Direct Focus Area ON OFF When 2 E or is selected the AF area can be moved when is selected the enlarged position can be moved e To set the items that use the cursor buttons like Drive Mode White Balance or Sensitivity use the Quick Menu P43 instead e The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the Metering Mode P168 is set to At the edge of the screen the metering may be affected by the brightness around the AF area e When Touch AF is set to AF AE the brightness optimisation position follows the movement of the AF area The AF area works as P172 Not available in these cases e Direct Focus Area is fixed to OFF in the following case Creative Control Mode e When using digital zoom the position and size of the AF area cannot be changed uv Focus and Exposure Settings Setting the desired focus method Using the Custom menu you can set the focus method in detail Fo Focusing not focusing when the shutter button is pressed halfway CKA Custom Shutter AF ON OFF Fo Releasing not releasing the shutter by pressing the shutter button halfway Wa Custom Half Press Release gt ON OFF Fo Focusing
119. Playback P238 Continuous playback of the Delete P80 Stop Motion Animation Group P241 O Stamped with text indication Name P200 202 4 P251 ion Location P52 8m30s Elapsed playback time P77 Title P250 a Picture size Recording information Aspect Ratio P139 E Recording format Recording quality P228 siz wt RAW Quality P140 aan Battery indication P27 339 O B s CY Detailed information display F1 7 60 to mw O 200 AF 1 Recording information Recorded date and time World Time P51 ez Intelligent Dynamic Range or Control P142 Picture size HRR HDR P143 Aspect Ratio P139 R Intelligent Resolution P142 sZ RAW Quality P140 Pi Shading Compensation SOB Colour space P145 P144 100 001 Folder File number P324 Histogram display o Histogram P78 1 98 Picture number Total pictures 2 100 001 Folder File number P324 Recording information x1 m is an abbreviation for minute and s for second 2 It is displayed in order of Title Location Name Baby1 Baby2 Pet Name Face Recog 3 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in AVCHD x4 This is not displayed for motion pictures 340 vu oes S Message Display Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen
120. Ratio Settings Description of settings 4 3 Aspect Ratio of a 4 3 TV 3 2 Aspect Ratio of a 35 mm film camera 16 9 Aspect Ratio of a high definition TV etc 1 1 Square aspect ratio e The ends of the recorded pictures may be cut at printing so check before printing P369 T2 Not available in these cases e Not available with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Setting the number of pixels Applicable modes mM PASM Set the number of pixels The higher the numbers of pixels the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when they are printed onto large sheets UA Rec Picture Size When the aspect ratio is 4 3 When the aspect ratio is 3 2 Settings Image size Settings Image size L 16M 4592x3448 L 14M 4592 x 3064 IZM 8M 3232 X 2424 4M 7M 3232 X 2160 IBAS 4M 2272x1704 IBAS 3 5M 2272x1520 2 O B Image and Picture Quality Settings When the aspect ratio is 16 9 When the aspect ratio is 1 1 Settings Image size Settings Image size L 12M 4592x2584 L 11 5M 3424 x 3424 34M 6M 3232x 1824 4M 6M 2416X2416 BAS 2M 1920 x 1080 BAS 3M 17121712 e When Ex Tele Conv P211 is set B4 is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio except for L e The picture size will be fixed to S when Burst Rate is set to SH T2 Not available in these cases e Not available with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode
121. Remove the lens rear cap from the lens e If the body cap is fitted to the camera remove it Align the lens fitting marks and then rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow until it clicks We e Do not press the lens release button when you attach a lens e Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens mount may get scratched e Be sure to remove the lens cap when recording e Do not insert your fingers into the mount when the lens and body cap are removed from the camera body e To prevent dust or debris from adhering to internal parts of the camera body fit the body cap or a lens to the mount on the camera body e To prevent scratching of the contact points fit the lens rear cap to the lens when it is unattached or fit the lens to the camera body e It is recommended to attach the lens cap or attach the MC Protector optional to protect the lens surface when carrying P333 Propeaten CY i Detaching the lens Preparations Attach the lens cap While pressing on the lens release button rotate the lens toward the arrow until it stops and then remove 2 Fo To enable disable the shutter release without lens UAT Custom Shoot w o Lens ON Shutter will operate regardless of the lens on the unit OFF Shutter will not operate when a lens is not attached to the camera body or is not attached correctly e When using a Leica lens mount
122. Scope are not compatible with Mac 322 Connecting to other equipment E Transferring pictures to a PC aS Preparations Install PHOTOfunSTUDIO to the PC ca 1 Connect the computer and camera with the USB connection cable supplied e Please turn this unit on and your PC before connecting e Check the directions of the connectors and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out Otherwise the connectors may bend out of shape which will cause a malfunction e Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic USB connection cable DMW USBC1 optional a USB connection cable supplied Align the marks and insert 2 Press A V to select PC and then press MENU SET If USB Mode P56 is set to PC in the Setup menu in advance the camera will be automatically connected to the PC without displaying the USB Mode selection screen e When the camera is connected to a PC while USB Mode is set to PictBridge PTP a message may appear on the PC screen In that case close the message and remove the USB connection cable safely and then set the USB Mode to PC 3 Copy the images to a PC using PHOTOfunSTUDIO e Do not delete or move copied files or folders in Windows Explorer When viewing in PHOTOfunSTUDIO you will not be able to play back or edit e Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor optional If the
123. Select the menu O bm CA Custom AFS AFF AFC 2 Press A F to select item and press MENU p aaa SET Select focus mode according to the movement of the subject and the scene you are recording e The set focus mode will be assigned to AF of the focus mode lever The movement of the Item subject and the scene Description of settings recommended AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single Focus is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway Subject is still AFS Scenery anniversary photograph etc AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible In this mode focusing is performed Movement cannot be automatically when the shutter button is pressed AFF predicted halfway Children pets etc If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed halfway the focus is corrected to match the movement automatically AFC is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Continuous In this mode while the shutter button is pressed halfway focusing is constantly Subject is moving performed to match the movement of the Sport trains etc subject When the subject is moving the focusing is performed by predicting the subject position at the time of recording Movement prediction AFC Focus and Exposure Settings When recording using AFF AFC e It may take time to focus
124. This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed halfway or when the brightness of the subject changes This is not a malfunction e This may occur more often when a bright lens such as the interchangeable lens H H020A is used for recording in brightly lit outdoor environments The picture is not displayed on the monitor e Does the picture appear on the viewfinder Press LVF to switch to monitor display P63 e Is the monitor switched off Switch the display by pressing DISP P71 Monitor and viewfinder do not switch when LVF is pressed e It is only displayed on the monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer Black red blue and green dots appear on the Monitor e This is not a malfunction These pixels do not affect the recorded pictures The picture on the monitor shakes for a moment during recording e This is not a malfunction If the camera is subjected to a jolt or impact the picture on the monitor may shake for a moment O B s CY Noise appears on the monitor e In dark places noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor You see red green or blue flashes when you move your eyes in the viewfinder or when the camera is moved rapidly e This is a characteristic of the drive system of the viewfinder of this unit and it is not a malfunction There will be no problem with the recorded image Playback The picture bein
125. a printer that supports panorama pictures For details please see the operating instructions of your printer We recommend using the PHOTOfunSTUDIO software on the CD ROM supplied to adjust the size of the still picture to the print paper size The camera makes a noise when this unit is turned on e This is the noise of the Dust Reduction Function working P372 it is not a malfunction There is a sound from lens unit e It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when this unit is turned on or off and it is not a malfunction e You may hear a sound from the lens and image in the monitor may suddenly change when the brightness has changed by zoom operation or moving the camera but there is no effect on recording The sound is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture This is not a malfunction 369 s CY An unreadable language was selected by mistake Press MENU SET select the Setup menu icon and then select the R8 icon to set the desired language P59 Part of the picture is flashing in black and white we e This is a highlight function showing the white saturated area P79 A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway e In dark places the AF Assist Lamp P157 lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on e Is AF Assist Lamp set to ON P157 e The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on in bri
126. abbreviation for minute and s for second 334 es CY TIR mE Name P202 Number of days that have passed since the departure date P52 Age P202 Location P52 f 17 Current date and time sy Travel siz RAW destination setting P51 Quality P140 AFS AFF AFC Focus Mode P147 Oo Se EE m AF Mode P146 Ea 2 Face Recognition P197 AFL AF Lock P164 Esh EH Ey Burst P179 iB Auto Bracket P183 S ces Self timer P186 TTL Battery indication P27 Picture Mode Still picture to priorities P233 ch ci ae Image Stabiliser TO Jitter alert P204 Recording state Flashes red Focus Lights green P65 Time Lapse Shot P189 Histogram P73 x1 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the Profile Setup setting is set x2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on after setting the clock and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode 335 Sy E O kari Dial operation guide P18 E White Balance Bracket P138 AWB White Balance
127. aeeeeeneeenaneseeanenees 210 Raising the telescopic effect n aeea eeaeee aeee AEEA EE aS 211 Zooming using touch operations e eea a 216 6 Taking pictures by using the flaSh ccccesssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeessaaeeeeees 217 a Changing Flashi Modens ea acc sacs se ee cosee eee E eee a ete 219 N Sie Male Ihe the 2nd Curtain oynchro a se ceccocenacserucshasteechestrecubeareareccse 222 sAdust Me aS outu re cere ree se a ect eeeratnerenter A neoete ssc 223 e Synchronising the output of the built in flash to NY thevEXPOSUre COMPCNSATION e a cea eaea a E E A 223 e Changing the firing mode Manual flash ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 224 5 e Setting the wireless flash s s snaniesnenaienenarirenririsnerariererirrrraririerererrnrnn 224 N7 C OMECUME EG CV OSs a ar a a E e 227 Motion Picture Recording Motion Picture ae eaaa ea ea e a aa ae a 228 e Setting the format size and frame rate ccccccccecseeeeceeseeceeeeseeeeeseaeees 228 e How to set focus when recording a motion picture Continuous AF 230 RecordingiMotoni Eic ure Te ae a a sao aren mene cn amnnet ausraeeen 231 Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures sssssssssssnnssnnnnne 233 Using the Motion Picture Menu ccccssecceeeeeeeeceneseeneeeseeeeeceeeeeenenseeeees 235 IRGG Fr Oli ell Aaa ee cet a a a a a a a a a a ee 235 SiReCi a E a E a E E a 235 eT
128. al setting Items other than the picture quality adjustment in Photo Style Sensitivity Metering Mode Highlight Shadow HDR Digital Zoom Multi Exp e Although white balance is fixed to AWB for certain types of scene you can fine tune the white balance or use white balance bracketing by pressing the cursor button on the recording screen For further details please read P137 138 Recording Modes The brightness of the face is adjusted and the background is defocused to create a clear portrait Sg O Tips is zs 22 e f you are using a lens with the zoom function you can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the distance between the camera and the subject Silky Skin Brighter face and softer skin colour creates a healthy younger look O Tips e If you are using a lens with the zoom function you can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the distance between the camera and the subject eo e The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar tone to the complexion of a subject as well e This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting Backlit Softness When backlighted the overall screen brightness is increased Portraits are softened and infused with light Pecorino voses CY Clear in Backlight Outdoors the flash will be used to more evenly illuminate the subject s face
129. ame of the recorded picture changes as shown P1000001 JPG Ir P sRGB _ AdobeRGB e Set to sRGB if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB e The setting is fixed to SRGB in the following case When recording motion pictures 145 Focus and Exposure Settings D SS Applicable modes P A S M pem c1 c2 c3 s This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected Taking Pictures with Auto Focus 1 Set the focus mode lever to AF 2 Set AFS AFF AFC in the Custom menu to AFS AFF or AFC P147 3 Press lt 4 4 Press lt gt to select AF Mode and then press MENU SET e AF area selection screen is displayed when is pressed while 23 J or is selected For operation in the AF area selection screen refer to P153 i fs oa e The AF Mode is fixed to in the following cases When using the Digital Zoom Miniature Effect Creative Control Mode T2 Not available in these cases e It cannot be set to 48 in the following cases Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Appetizing Food Cute Dessert Scene Guide Mode e The L is disabled in the following case AFF AFC AFS AFF AFC Focus and Exposure Settings About the focus mode AFS AFF AFC Applicable modes yP A S M am c1 c2 c3 ee 1
130. an be selected to match the image you wish to record It is possible to adjust the items such as colour or picture quality of the effect to your desire CAm Rec Photo Style Settings Description of settings 3sro Standard This is the standard setting Svp Vivid Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast 3Nar Natural Soft effect with low saturation Siono Monochrome Monochrome effect with no colour shades Sony Scenery An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens SPorr Portrait An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone 3 usr Custom Use the setting registered in advance This is disabled when Intelligent Auto Plus fF Mode is selected e In Intelligent Auto Plus gf Mode the setting will be reset to Standard when the camera is switched to another Recording Mode or this unit is turned on and off e In Scene Guide Mode a photo style which matches each scene is fixed e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed E Adjusting the picture quality e Picture quality cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Plus J Standard gt Mode ee 1 Press lt gt to select the type of Photo Style e In Scene Guide Mode you cannot select the photo style 2 Press A F to select the items and then press lt gt to
131. and the AF Assist lamp are forced off The following settings are fixed Electronic Shutter ON Flash Mode Forced Flash Off AF Assist Lamp OFF Beep Volume OFF E Shutter Vol 8X OFF Speaker Volume 0 e Even when ON is set the following functions light up flash Status indicator Self timer indicator Wi Fi connection lamp e Operational sounds of the camera such as the sound of the lens aperture being adjusted are not muted e Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy the likeness rights etc of the subject when you use this function Use at your own risk 2 Taking Pictures with No Shutter Sound Electronic Shutter Applicable modes PASM The shutter sound can be turned off for recording in a quiet environment The mechanical shutter is disabled making it easier to take pictures with minimised blur We recommended making a trial recording in advance because distorted subjects and horizontal stripes may be recorded depending on the recording conditions Select the menu Ua Rec Electronic Shutter Settings ON OFF e Flash is fixed to Forced Flash Off e Under fluorescent or LED lighting etc horizontal stripes may appear on recorded pictures In such cases lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes e If a subject is moving the subject may appear distorted on the picture taken e If jit
132. and try again e You can check the transmission status on the web service link settings by logging into LUMIX CLUB I would like to return the image in the web service to the camera e The images in the web service cannot be saved downloaded to this unit Do not delete the uploaded images and make a backup of them cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the web service by this unit e The images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit Perform the task using a smartphone tablet or a PC Your LUMIX CLUB login ID and password were deleted after sending the camera in to be repaired e The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair Always make a copy of important settings There is an image that could not be transmitted e Is the size of the image too large Divide the motion picture using Video Divide P254 Reduce the image size at Size P308 e Capacity or number of images in the web service is full Login to LUMIX CLUB and check the status of the destination on the web service link settings have forgotten the password for the Wi Fi Execute the Reset Wi Fi Settings in the Setup menu P60 However all the information you have set on the Wi Fi Setup menu will be reset excluding LUMIX CLUB Transmission of the image fails midway e Is the size of the image too large Transmit af
133. anorama shot direction P109 am oOo Fn5 Function button P49 for Selects an image effect filter an 3 O Fn6 Function button P49 R P110 mn 5 N Fn7 Function button P49 4 F Aperture value P65 qn J Fn8 Function button P49 Iss Shutter speed P65 Co n Fn9 Function button P49 ISO ISO sensitivity P174 Colour P88 Go Microphone level adjustment P237 Defocus control function P86 114 Brightness P87 115 Type of defocus Miniature Effect P121 TETEG 337 a 5 B s CY On monitor recording information Single P65 Burst P179 31 3 Auto Bracket P183 SMX Self timer P186 AFS AFF AFC MF Focus Mode P147 158 Brightness P87 Manual Exposure Assistance P95 slo gt CUST ceo imn o ee a eS m AF Mode P146 Recording Mode P69 1 Fo ES el siz et RAW Quality P140 F1 7 Aperture value P65 Picture size 1 60 Shutter speed P65 Aspect Ratio P139 aan Battery indication P27 Wi Fi Wi Fi P266 Function button setting Fn P47 200 ISO sensitivity P174 O Exposure compensation TAO value P166 4STD VIVD NAT Bo smono Sscny PORT Photo Style P130 440 S s Flash Mode P219 AWB Xt Mot Os
134. arge diameter lens the lens may come into contact with the pedestal depending on the tripod unipod Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens Therefore it is recommended to attach the tripod adaptor DMW TA1 optional before mounting on the tripod unipod e Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully i About the shoulder strap e If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens more than about 1 kg 35 3 oz to the camera body do not carry the camera by the shoulder strap Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them 378 U s CY e G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System ZA W HwWD TM standard Progressive e Micro Four Thirds and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation in Japan the United States the European Union and other countries e Four Thirds and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation in Japan the United States the European Union and other PictBridge countries USB LAN WLAN SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC Y o e AVCHD AVCHD Progressive and the AVCHD Progressive logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation e Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol
135. ariable Bit Rate and the bit rate volume of data for definite period of time is changed automatically depending on the subject to record Therefore the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast movement is recorded How to set focus when recording a motion picture Continuous AF Applicable modes e lP A S M len c12 c3 EN The method for achieving focus varies depending on the focus mode AFS AFF AFC P147 and Manual Focus P158 and the Continuous AF setting in the Motion Picture menu Focus Mode Continuous AF Description of settings The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects ON during recording P147 AFS AFF AFC e To readjust the focus press the shutter button halfway The camera maintains the focus position at the start OFF of recording MF ONJ OFF You can focus manually P158 e The interchangeable lens H H020A utilises a lens drive system to realize a compact and bright F1 7 lens As a result sound and vibration may occur during focus operation but this is not a malfunction Depending on the recording conditions or lens used operational sound may be recorded when the Auto Focus is operated while recording a motion picture It is recommended to record with Continuous AF in the Motion Picture menu set to OFF if the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise e When operating the zoom when recording motion pictures it may take time to com
136. artphone tablet e Check that your smartphone tablet is a compatible model e Turn on the Wi Fi function e Install the Image App in advance P269 Play back the picture you want to transfer to the smartphone tablet in the camera Launch Image App on the smartphone tablet at the transfer destination While 6 is displayed on the connection screen of the Image App touch the smartphone tablet to 6 of this unit e It may take time to complete the connection e If a connection attempt by touching fails restart the Image App and then display the screen in step 2 again They cannot be transferred as a batch e Depending on the environment you are using it may take a few minutes to complete the image transfer 279 uv Wi Fi NFC 4 Sending images in the camera to an SNS Connect to a smartphone tablet P270 Select on the smartphone tablet Drag an image to send it to an SNS etc e The image is sent to a web service such as an SNS The function can be assigned to the top bottom left or right according to your preference ND Sending location information to the camera from a smartphone tablet You can acquire location information from a smartphone tablet and write it on images afterwards Refer to P247 for how to write the location information on the images recorded by this unit e Read the Help in the Image App menu
137. ash O Zooming in with the Extra Tele Conversion in steps CA Rec Ex Tele Conv ZOOM TA gt a Magnification level of the Extra Tele Conversion The operation can be performed by using the zoom lever or A lt gt e This can be used only when recording pictures e To operate the zoom with the cursor buttons press the function button to which Zoom Control in Fn Button Set P47 of the Custom menu has been set e When using an interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom Extra Tele Conversion becomes available after zooming in to the Tele end of the optical zoom Optical Zoom range Focal length T 42 EX 13x Extra Tele Conversion range for still picture recording Zoom magnification jl x This zoom slider is displayed when using an interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom e A constant zoom speed will be set e The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation Stabiliser Zoom and Flash O Simply zooming in with the Extra Tele Conversion Day Rec Ex Tele Conv TELE CONV Ua Motion Picture Ex Tele Conv ON o Ra d OFF e When the Extra Tele Conversion is used angle of view for still pictures will be different from the angle of view for motion pictures because the zoom factor is different between them Angle of view for recording can be checked beforehand by matching the Rec Area P
138. ate in accordance with the screen Also if Fn3 is pressed or Qn is touched during the pause a selection screen asking you to resume or end will be displayed Pressing the shutter button fully will also enable you to resume from the pause e This function is not for use in a security camera e If you leave the unit somewhere to perform Time Lapse Shot please be careful of theft e Recording for long periods in cold places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude or in warm wet environments may cause a malfunction so please be careful e Recording may not be consistent with the set recording interval or the set number of pictures depending on recording conditions e Recording may be skipped when the recording time is longer than the recording interval such as long time exposure e We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor optional and a DC coupler optional e Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases During Time Lapse Shot you can replace the battery and the card and then restart by turning on this unit Turn off this unit when replacing the battery or the card When the charge on the battery runs out Turning the camera off e Do not connect the AV cable optional the HDMI mini cable or the USB connection cable supplied during Time Lapse Shooting e When only one picture is taken it will not be saved as a group picture T2 Not available in these cases e Tim
139. ating the front dial during Playback Zoom e Images can also be forwarded or rewound by setting the image forward rewind operation by pressing the rear dial during Playback Zoom and then touching I lt gt 1 or pressing the cursor button lt gt O B ese CY Playing Back Motion Pictures This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD MP4 and QuickTime Motion JPEG formats In Playback Mode select a picture with the motion picture icon and then press A to play back Motion picture recording time e After playback starts the elapsed playback time is displayed on the screen For example 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as 8m30s e Some information recording information etc is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in AVCHD e Touching gt in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures E Operations during Motion Picture Playback pem imate a Frame by frame rewind Frame by frame forward ET while pausing while pausing Rear dial Reduce volume level Rear dial Increase volume level e Control panel disappears after approximately 2 seconds if no operation is performed Touch the screen to redisplay the control panel x The fast forward rewind speed increases if you press lt again e When using a high capacity card it is possible that fast rewinding may be slower than usual e To play back the motion picture
140. ation in P211 image quality Increases the Tele effect The higher the level of Digital Zoom magnification the greater the degradation in image P215 quality 346 s CY Set this when you want to correct the colour Color Space reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC printer P145 etc c ai eee rain TREET Stabilizer en camera shake is sensed during recording the P203 camera corrects it automatically Face Recog Sets the focus and exposure automatically prioritising P197 registered faces If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in Profile Setup advance you can record their name and age in months P202 and years in the images 347 es CY Motion Picture O This menu lets you set the Rec Format Rec Quality and other aspects for motion picture recording ST e Photo Style Metering Mode Highlight Shadow i Dynamic i Resolution and Digital Zoom are common to both the Rec menu and Motion Picture menu Changing these 5 settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu Yy For details refer to the explanation for the corresponding setting in the Rec menu Rec Format Sets the file format for the motion pictures you record P228 Rec Quality This sets up the picture quality of motion pictures P228 Select the method for setting the aperture value and Exposure VOCE shutter speed in Creative Video Mode i Picture Mode Sets the
141. ay lt gt Select the items year month day A V Setting MENU SET Set Enter Name For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text on P61 6 Press Y to select Exit and then press MENU SET to finish Q A OUN E To cancel Age and Name Select the OFF setting in step 1 e The age and name can be printed out using the PHOTOfunSTUDIO bundled software on the CD ROM supplied Not available in these cases e Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording gg motion picture priorities P233 will not record age or name 202 vue Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Optical Image Stabiliser The camera detects jitter during recording and automatically corrects it so you can record images with reduced jitter There are two types of Optical Image Stabilisers the one built into a lens and the one built into this unit The Optical Image Stabiliser of either a lens or this unit will be enabled E Compatible Optical Image Stabilisers The Optical Image Stabiliser of either a lens or this unit works depending on the lens in use Micro Four Thirds mount specification lens Four Thirds mount specification lens e Use a mount adaptor DMW MA1 optional Leica mount specification lens Lens in use Supporting the Optical Image Stabiliser function e The interchangeable lens H FS1442A supports the Optical Image Stabiliser function Not supporti
142. background colour from four colours Exit the menu after it is set Preparation Calling frequently used menus instantly Quick Menu l By using the Quick Menu some of the menu settings can be easily found e The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in Q MENU Fn1 button can be used in two ways as Q MENU or as Fn1 function 1 At the time of purchase it is initially set to Q MENU e Refer to P47 for details about the function button 1 Press Q MENU to display the Quick Menu s Sm O RAE s AFS E 2 Rotate the rear dial to select the menu item then press the rear dial E E x ste SID gt VIVD NAT gt MONO ale ale slo SCNY SPORT CUST 1 7 60 z0 AUS AWB iio O AEJ AFS E Rotate the rear dial to select the setting A GW Press Q MENU to exit the menu once the setting is complete e You can close the menu by pressing the shutter button 17 60 0 AU halfway e You can also set items by pressing the cursor buttons A W lt gt On monitor recording information in Monitor style P71 Press Q MENU rotate the rear dial to select an item and EJ Z0 B20 then press the rear dial g Rotate the rear dial to select the setting and then press the c ars c B wril of rear dial to set it sso awe
143. been registered Perform steps 3 through 5 of Configuring the external AV device settings Edit Delete information on AV device that has already been registered e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Delete e Exit the menu after it is set 300 U Wi Fi NFC 4 About Connections You can select a connection method after selecting a Wi Fi function and a destination Performing a direct connection is convenient for when you are in a place away from home where wireless access points are not available or for when connecting temporarily to a device you do not usually use When connecting with the same settings as the previous ones you can use the Wi Fi function quickly by connecting via Select a destination from History or Select a destination from Favorite Direct vu Wi Fi NFC d Connecting from your house via the network You can select the method for connecting to a wireless access point Ties p i x WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the WPS device the settings related to the connection and security of wireless yey greene LAN devices To check if the wireless access point you are using is compatible with WPS refer to the manual of the wireless access point WPS PIN code 3 Connection method Description of settings Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with Wi Fi Protected Se
144. biliser of this unit works only when taking pictures VG If your lens is not based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard make the following settings e Set the Shoot w o Lens to ON P23 e Set the focal length of your lens in Focal Length Set P207 If a lens not based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard is in use when the Optical Image Stabiliser of this unit is available a confirmation message for the focal length setting is displayed after this unit is turned on Selecting Yes enables you to set Focal Length Set in Stabilizer 1 Select the menu ANI Rec Stabilizer 2 Press A V to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Ci Vertical and horizontal shake are compensated for Normal Camera shake is corrected for up down movements This Operation 204 mode is ideal for panning a method of taking pictures Mode wes which involves turning the camera to track the Panning movements of a subject which continues to move ina fixed direction Stabilizer does not work Focal The focal length of your lens can be set or registered P207 Length Set x This item can be set only when your lens is not based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard e Exit the menu after it is set 206 Stbiser Zoom and Fish O O i Setting the focal length of a lens e Wh
145. bject e We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e For close up recording we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it Freeze Animal Motion The faster shutter speed prevents blur and captures a clear image of the fast moving animal Recowingmoses CY Clear Sports Shot The faster shutter speed prevents blur for example at sporting events Monochrome A monochrome image captures the mood of the moment Recording Modes Panorama Shot Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama O B 1 Check the recording direction and then press MENU SET A horizontal vertical guide is displayed O Changing the recording direction Select the menu CANI Rec Panorama Settings Direction Select the recording direction and then press MENU SET a left gt right I right gt left jal 11 bottom gt top Js top bottom O Adding an image effect Select the menu CANI Rec Panorama Settings Filter Select Press A to select the image effects filters e With the same operation as the Creative Control Mode the same image effect as the Creative Control Mode can be added P113 excluding Toy Effect Toy Pop Miniature Effect and Sunshine e During panorama picture recording the following image effects of the Creative Control Mode are not visible on t
146. ble modes P A S M Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed 1 Select the menu CAm Rec Flash 2 Press A F to select Flash Adjust and then press MENU SET 3 Press lt P gt to set the flash output and then press MENU SET e You can adjust from 3 EV to 3 EV in steps of 1 3 EV e Select 0 to return to the original flash output e or is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted e It can be set only when Wireless in Flash is set to OFF and Firing Mode is set to TTL P224 e The Flash Adjust setting also applies to an external flash excluding the wireless flash P331 Synchronising the output of the built in flash to the Exposure Compensation Applicable modes PIA S M When Auto Exposure Comp in Flash in the Rec menu is set to ON the brightness of the built in flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation e For details on Exposure Compensation refer to P166 e The Auto Exposure Comp setting also applies to an external flash P331 223 v Stabiliser Zoom and Flash 4 Changing the firing mode Manual flash Applicable modes PI A S M You can set a flash type at Firing Mode in Flash Item Description of settings TTL The camera automatically sets the flash output Set the luminos
147. button e You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete e A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs e The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when Auto Align is set to ON e Flash is fixed to Forced Flash Off Not available in these cases e HDR does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording e HDR is not available in the following cases When Quality is set to RAWs s RAW 2 or RAW When using Time Lapse Shot n Stop Motion Animation only when Auto Shooting is set 143 u Image and Picture Quality Settings Reducing the long shutter noise Long Shtr NR Applicable modes P A S M The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures of night scenery etc so you can take beautiful pictures Aa Rec Long Shtr NR Settings ON OFF e Long shutter noise reduction ongoing is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for signal processing e We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slowed to take pictures Not available in these cases e In the following cases Long Shtr NR does not work Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode When recording motion pictures When Burst Rate is set to SH When Electronic Shutter is set to ON Correcting the brightness on the screen periphery Shading
148. cancel by turning off this unit When Self Timer Auto Off P59 is set to ON O e We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self timer vu Shutter Drive Settings e Time setting for the self timer can also be set by Self Timer in the Rec menu e Depending on the recording conditions the recording interval may become more than 2 seconds when a is selected e The flash output may vary slightly when the a is selected Not available in these cases e It cannot be set to m in the following conditions When White Balance Bracket is set Multi Exp e Self timer is disabled in the following cases Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode When recording motion pictures When using Time Lapse Shot In Stop Motion Animation only when Auto Shooting is set Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals Time Lapse Shot Applicable modes MAS P A S M You can set the recording start time the recording interval and the number of pictures and automatically record subjects such as animals and plants as time elapses Pictures are recorded as a single Picture Group P240 You can create motion pictures using Time Lapse Video in Playback menu P255 e Set the date and time settings in advance P38 E Set the recording time interval number of pictures 1 Select the menu CAm Rec Time
149. carrying the LZ card e Do not allow dirt dust or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not touch the terminals with your fingers Notice for when transferring to another party or disposing of the memory card e Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management information it will not erase the data in the memory card completely It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially available computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the memory card before transferring to another party or disposing Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user 3 6 2 pomes CY i About the personal information If a name or birthday is set for Profile Setup Face Recognition function this personal information is kept in the camera and recorded in the image Setting a Wi Fi password is recommended to protect personal information P310 Disclaimer e Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous operation effect of static electricity accident malfunction repair or other handlings Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information When requesting a repair transferring to another party or disposing e After making a copy of personal information
150. cation displays red when pictures are being recorded on the card 3sm Eoso E L aks e During access image writing reading and deleting formatting etc do not turn this unit off remove the battery card or disconnect the AC adaptor optional Furthermore do not subject the camera to vibration impact or static electricity The card or the data on the card may be damaged and this unit may no longer operate normally If operation fails due to vibration impact or static electricity perform the operation again O B Preparation 4 e Write Protect switch a provided When this switch is set to the LOCK position no further data writing deletion or formatting is possible The ability to write delete and format data is restored when the switch is returned to its original position e The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card We recommend storing important data on a PC etc e Do not format the card on your PC or other equipment Format it on the camera only to ensure proper operation P60 e Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing Formatting the card initialisation Format the card before recording a picture with this unit P60 Since data cannot be recovered after formatting make sure to back up necessary data in advance Select the menu CAN Setup Format
151. ck AF ON If AF AE LOCK is pressed in Manual Focus Auto Focus will work e Auto Focus works at the centre of the frame e lf Auto Focus is used while the MF Assist screen is displayed the centre of the MF Assist screen will be focused e Auto Focus also works with the following touch operations Touching 4 Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to focus on Fo Setting the display method of the MF Assist CAm Custom MF Assist Item Description of settings Enlarge by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever or b OD ge by g g g y pressing lt 4 FEJ Qos Enlarge by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever Enlarge by pressing lt OFF MF Assist is not displayed amp 2 Focus and Exposure Settings FO Highlighting not highlighting in focus portions CAm Custom Peaking Item Description of settings ON In focus portions are highlighted with colour OFF In focus portions are not highlighted The detection level for in focus portions is set When HIGH is set portions to be highlighted are Detect Level reduced allowing you to achieve a more precise focus HIGH LOW e The detection level setting does not affect the focus range Sets the highlighting colour used for Peaking When Detect Level is set to HIGH L Light blue L_ Yellow Green When Detect Level is set to LOW Hj
152. connection before sending is a R5 complete unsent pictures will not be resent e You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu while sending Not available in these cases e Motion pictures cannot be sent Send Images Stored in the Camera Images can be selected and sent after recording e Details of the playback menu Favorite or Print Set settings will not be sent Not available in these cases e Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent e Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent 307 a g 2 Wi Fi NFC d i Changing the settings for sending images Pressing DISP after completing a connection allows you to change the settings for sending such as the image size for sending Item Size File Format Delete Location Data Cloud Limit Description of settings Resize the image to send Original Auto Change e If you select Auto the image size is determined by the circumstances at the destination e You can select the image size for Change from M S or VGA The aspect ratio does not change JPG RAW JPG RAW Select whether to delete the location information from images before sending them ON Delete the location information then send OFF Keep the location information and send e This operation only deletes the location information from the images that
153. creen by pressing DISP 3 Press A V of the cursor button to select the setting and press MENU SET Fa C The setting can also be made by selecting an option by rotating the rear dial and then pressing the rear dial e Depending on the menu item its setting may not appear Picture Size Metering Mode Increase the number of recordat z2s or it may be displayed in a different way Preparation O e There are functions that cannot be set or used depending on the modes or menu settings being SY used on the camera due to the specifications In these operating instructions steps for setting a menu item are described as follows Ua Rec gt Quality gt z2 E Close the menu Press 1 5 or press the shutter button halfway E Switching to other menus e g Switching to the Setup menu from Rec menu Press lt 2 Press A to select or another of the menu A toggle icons 3 Press MENU SET e Select a menu item next and set it Set compression level of picture Photo Style Tro Ea Aspect Ratio Picture Size Metering Mode e You can also select the menu toggle icons by rotating the front dial Setting the menu screen background You can set the background for the menu screen according to your preferences 1 Select the menu LEAN Setup Menu Background 2 Press A V to select the background colour and then press MENU SET e You can select the
154. ct the unit to a 3D compatible television using the HDMI mini cable and display the playback screen P315 e When VIERA Link P58 is set to ON and the camera is connected to a TV supporting VIERA Link input of the TV will be switched automatically and playback screen will be displayed Refer to P318 for details e For the pictures recorded in 3D 3D will appear on the thumbnail display at playback E Playback in 3D by selecting only the still pictures recorded in 3D Select 3D Play in Playback Mode in the Playback menu P245 E Playback as a 3D slide show by selecting only the still pictures recorded in 3D Select 3D in Slide Show in the Playback menu P242 E Switch the playback method for the still pictures recorded in 3D 1 Select the picture recorded in 3D 2 Select 2D 3D Settings on the Playback menu P40 e Playback method will switch to 3D if it is playing back in 2D conventional image or it will switch to 2D if it is playing back in 3D e If you feel tired uncomfortable or otherwise strange when playing back pictures recorded in 3D set to 2D E Functions that cannot be set do not work with 3D pictures e Highlight Custom menu e Playback Zoom e Editing functions of Playback menu Location Logging Clear Retouch Title Edit Text Stamp Video Divide Time Lapse Video Stop Motion Video Resize Cropping Rotate Favorite Print Set Protect Face Rec Edit x Can be us
155. cted images Send Images Stored in the Camera x A motion picture recorded in AVCHD can be sent to PC if the file size is 4 GB or smaller It cannot be sent if the size is greater than 4 GB e Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device e For information on the playback of images check the operating instructions of the destination device e For details on how to send images refer to P307 Preparations e Turn the computer on e Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC P286 If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting you also need to change the setting of this unit in PC Connection P309 Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording P287 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera P288 e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract 285 O B Wi Fi NFC d i To create a folder that receives images e Create a PC user account account name up to 254 characters and password up to 32 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters An attempt to create a receive folder may fail if the account includes non alphanumeric characters E When using PHOTOfunSTUDIO 1 Install PHOTOfunSTUDIO to the PC
156. cting the existing item e To cancel the setting move to the bottom row by pressing V and select an item to cancel and then press MENU SET Items that can be set are as follows Rec menu Recording functions e Photo Style P130 e Flash Mode P219 e Picture Setting Aspect Ratio P139 Ex Tele Conv Picture Size P139 still pictures motion pictures P211 e Quality P140 e Digital Zoom P215 e Metering Mode P168 e Stabilizer P203 i Dynamic P142 e Sensitivity P174 e i Resolution P142 e White Balance P134 HDR P143 e AF Mode P146 e Electronic Shutter P196 e Drive Mode P178 u Preparation d Motion Picture menu Custom menu e Motion Pic Set Rec Format P235 e Silent Mode P195 Rec Quality P235 e AFS AFF AFC P147 e Picture Mode P233 e Peaking P160 e Histogram P73 e Guide Line P73 e Rec Area P231 e Step Zoom P214 e Zoom Speed P214 4 Press 5 e It will return to screen of step 1 Press MENU SET to switch to the recording screen O oO Preparation A Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons function buttons You can assign frequently used functions to particular buttons or icons 1 Select the menu CAm Custom gt Fn Button Set 2 Press A Y to select Setting in REC mode or Setting in PLAY mode and then
157. ction e When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting LED lighting fixture mercury lamp sodium lighting etc the colours and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen Bright spot not in subject is recorded e There may be defective pixels in the image sensor Perform Pixel Refresh P60 You cannot compensate the exposure e Are you in Exposure Compensation operation Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation P166 Subject cannot be locked AF tracking not possible e Set the AF area to the distinctive colour of the subject if there is a part that is different from the surrounding colour P150 Operation sound is small e Is your finger covering up the speaker P13 Recording with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode stops in the middle e If the camera is moved too slowly the camera has assumed that camera motion was stopped and will end the still picture recording e If there is a great deal of shaking towards the recording direction while moving the camera recording will end 358 O B es CY Motion pictures Recording motion pictures is not possible e You may not be able to record for a short while after turning this unit on when using a large capacity card Motion picture recording stops in the middle e Use a card with SD Speed Class with Class 4 or higher when recording motion
158. d size of the AF area can be changed 1 2 Select 9 or and press V AF area setting screen is displayed Press A V lt P to move the AF area AF area can also be moved by touching the subject e Press DISP to return the AF area to the centre of the screen Rotate the rear dial to change the size of AF area frame e It can be changed to 4 different sizes e The area size can also be changed by pinching out pinching in P16 on the screen Press MENU SET to set AF area with the same function as is displayed in the touched position when the is selected Setting of the AF area is cleared when M is touched When selecting 3 The 23 AF areas can be divided into 9 areas and the area to be focused can be set 1 2 Select E and press V AF area setting screen is displayed oh cane Press A V lt P to select the AF area frame as shown in the figure on the right a iE B GH l P SP oO GH AF area frame can also be selected by touching the screen ea ee Ee Press MENU SET to set eo L amp E pe e Only display centre point of selected AF area frame will remain on the screen e Setting of the AF area frame is cleared when MENU SET is pressed or iA is touched 2 v Focus and Exposure Settings When selecting You can set the focus position precisely by
159. de Recording Mode If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the 5 example images the camera will set optimal exposure colour and focus allowing you to record in a manner appropriate to the scene 1 Set the mode dial to SCN 2 Press lt P gt to select the scene e The scene can also be selected by dragging an example image or the slide bar 3 Press MENU SET to set O It is also possible to display the selection screen by dseny touching the Recording Mode icon in Recording Mode E Switching the scene selection screen display Press DISP to switch the monitor screen e Each time DISP is pressed or Switch is touched the scene selection screen is switched Biasae a Normal display Guide display List display u Recording Modes O To enjoy a variety of picture effects When the scene selection screen display is set to the guide display tips for creating picture effects suitable for each scene etc is displayed To enjoy a wider variety of picture effects we recommend that you read them before taking pictures e Pages can be switched by pressing A V e To change Scene Guide Mode select the scx tab on the menu screen select Scene Switch and then press MENU SET You can return to step 2 e The following items cannot be set in Scene Guide Mode because the camera automatically adjusts them to the optim
160. de enables you to change the brightness and colour tone to your preferred settings from the ones set by the camera Setting brightness 1 Press the rear dial to display the setting screen e Each press of the rear dial switches among brightness setting Defocus Control P86 and end operation 2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness O B Recording Modes 4 i Setting colour 1 Press to display the setting screen 2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust colour e This will adjust the colour of the image from a reddish colour to a bluish colour e Press MENU SET to return to the recording screen E Change the settings by using the touch panel Touch ee Touch the item you want to set B Colour tone EA Brightness Drag the slide bar to set e Press MENU SET to return to the recording screen e If the Exposure Comp Reset is set to ON the brightness setting will return to the default level centre point when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched to another Recording Mode e The colour setting will return to the default level centre point when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched to another Recording Mode Recording Modes Taking Pictures with Your Favourite Settings Programme AE Mode Recording Mode P The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the brightness of the subject You can take pictures
161. dicated with GPS E To pause the recording of location information Press MENU SET while recording of the location information onto images is taking place e During a suspended period O is displayed Select the period with O to restart the recording process from the picture you left off E To delete the received location information 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Location Logging Delete Location Data 2 Press A F to select the period you want to delete then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e Location information can be written only to images taken on this camera T2 Not available in these cases e Location information will not be written on pictures taken after the location information had been sent P276 e Location information is not written onto the images recorded when Rec Format is set to AVCHD e When there is insufficient free space on the card location information might not be able to be written e When the card is locked location information cannot be written onto the images or received location information cannot be deleted 247 Tt Removing unnecessary parts Clear Retouch You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken e The erasure operation can only be performed by touching Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation 1 2 2 3 Select the menu CEAN Playback Clea
162. displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e The faces of subjects other than people pets etc cannot be registered e To display the description of the face registration press or touch 4 Press A F to select the item and then press MENU SET O e You can register up to 3 face images SS Item Name Age Add Images Description of settings It is possible to register names Press V to select SET and then press MENU SET Enter the name e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 It is possible to register the birthday Press V to select SET and then press MENU SET Press lt P to select the items Year Month Day and then press A to set and then press MENU SET To add additional face images Add Images Select the unregistered face recognition frame and then press MENU SET Perform step 3 in Face Settings To delete one of the face images Delete Press lt gt to select the face image to delete and then press MENU SET e This feature requires that at least one facial image remain once registered e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e Exit the menu after it is set 200 amp 2 i Change or delete the information for a registered person You can modify the pictures or information of an already registered person You can also delet
163. dures e When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the camera set Paper Size or Page Layout to da and then set the paper size or the layout on the printer For details refer to the operating instructions of the printer e When Print Set DPOF has been selected the Print with Date and Num of prints items are not displayed E Print with Date Item Description of settings ON Date is printed OFF Date is not printed e If the printer does not support date printing the date cannot be printed on the picture e Depending on the printer the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if this is the case e When printing images with a text stamp please remember to set print with date to OFF or the date will print on top e In some printers the picture date for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to 1 1 will be printed vertically When asking the photo shop to print the pictures e By stamping the date using Text Stamp P251 or setting date printing at the time of the Print Set P261 setting before going to a photo shop the dates can be printed on the pictures at the photo shop E Num of prints You can set the number of prints up to 999 e You can also use the rear dial to set 328 O So 2 Connecting to other equipment E Paper Size Item L 3 5 x 5 2L 5 x7 POSTCARD 16 9 A4 A3 10x15cm 4 x6
164. e Multi 2 Select an image you wish to stamp with text LY appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text Single setting Press lt gt to select the picture Press MENU SET Multi setting Press A V lt 41 P gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET repeat e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again Press lt to select OK and then press MENU SET to execute 3 Press A F to select Set and then press MENU SET u Playback Editing 4 5 N O Press A F to select text stamp items and then press MENU SET Press A F to select the settings and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings W O TIME Stamp the year month and date Shooting Date WITH TIME Stamp the year month day hour and minutes OFF 9 5 Name registered in Face Recog will be Face stamped Recognition Name Q R Name registered in Profile Setup will be Baby Pet stamped OFF ON Stamps the travel destination name set under OFF ON Stamps the travel date set under Travel Date Travel Date OFF ON Title input in the Title Edit will be stamped Title OFF Press 1 5 Press A to select OK and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed 252 vu Playback Editing d e When you print pictures stamped with text
165. e and then press MENU SET Press MENU SET to set N O Press MENU SET in the confirmation screen 2 Preparation Changing the Clock Setting Select Clock Set in the Setup menu P40 e The clock can be reset as shown in steps 5 and 6 e The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built in clock battery even without the battery Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built in battery e If the clock is not set the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the pictures with Text Stamp or order a photo studio to print the pictures e If the clock is set the correct date can be printed even if the date is not displayed on the screen of the camera Preparation hi Setting the Menu O This camera offers menu selections that allow you to customise its operation to maximise your picture taking experience In particular the Setup menu contains some important settings relating to the camera s clock and power Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera You can set the menus using two types of operation touch operations in which you touch the screen and button operations in which you press the cursor button and rotate the rear dial O If you set Menu Resume P58 in the Setup menu to ON the screen shows the last selected menu item It is set to ON at the time of purchase e When Menu Informa
166. e i Night Portrait i Night Scenery in Scene Detection ke e Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Clear Night Portrait Scene Guide Mode I e Clear Sports Shot Scene Guide Mode fof e i Food in Scene Detection e Appetizing Food Cute Dessert Scene Guide Mode fi Travel Date e Still pictures recorded continuously with burst speed set to SH e Time Lapse Shot Time Lapse Video N e Stop Motion Animation Stop Motion Video xPress A W lt 4 gt to select the person to play back and then press MENU SET As for group pictures the entire group is treated as a single picture with Face Recognition information e Categorisation of the motion pictures differ from the still pictures depending on the Recording Mode Some motion pictures may not be played back 245 Playback Editing 4 Using Playback Functions With this menu you can use various playback functions such as cropping and other editing of recorded images protect settings etc e With Clear Retouch Text Stamp Time Lapse Video Stop Motion Video Resize or Cropping a new edited picture is created A new picture cannot be created if there is no free space on the card so we recommend checking that there is free space before editing the picture oe Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture You can create a single still picture from a recorded motion pictu
167. e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Preparation Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording time 5 E Number of recordable pictures e 9999 is displayed if there are more than 10000 pictures remaining e Aspect ratio 4 3 Quality st ae TO 2 o f eo O ro 10 o no o e Aspect ratio 4 3 Quality RAWs PicweSize 268 868 se a 16M s o o O o S o w om E Available recording time when recording motion pictures e h is an abbreviation for hour m for minute and s for second e The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded e AVCHD Rec Quality 268 868 ses 64GB FHD 50i damos 1h00m aam FHD 25p FHD 24p 9m00s 42m00s 2h56m 5h58m HD 50p 13m00s 1h00m aam e MP4 Rec Quality 268 se 3268 64GB FHD 25p 11m00s 48m00s 3h21m 6h49m HD 25p 21m00s 1h33m 6h25m 13h2m VGA 25p 46m00s 3h25m 14h8m 28h42m u Preparation e The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time are an approximation These vary depending on the recording conditions and the type of card e The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time varies depending on the subjects e Maximum time to record motion pictures continuously with AVCHD is 29 minutes 59 seconds e Maximum time to rec
168. e Control Mode e In the following case RAWs RAW and RAW cannot be set Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Image and Picture Quality Settings Setting Image Related Functions Compensating the contrast and exposure O i Dynamic Intelligent dynamic range control Applicable modes P A S IM esul C1 C2 C3 seu Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the background and subject is great etc CAm Rec i Dynamic Settings AUTO HIGH STANDARD LOW OFF e AUTO automatically sets the intensity of the effect according to the recording conditions e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed T2 Not available in these cases e This feature may be automatically disabled depending on the lighting conditions e In the following cases i Dynamic does not work Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode When HDR is set to ON Raising the resolution i Resolution Applicable modes P A S M psm c1 c2 c3 se Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution Technology CAm Rec i Resolution Settings HIGH STANDARD LOW EXTENDED OFF e EXTENDED allows you to take natural pictures with a higher resolution e When recordi
169. e Lapse Shot is not available in the following cases Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Multi Exp When using Stop Motion Animation Applicable modes y e0 P ASM A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together e Set the date and time settings in advance P38 e Pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation are displayed as a set of group pictures P240 O Before creating a motion picture with Stop Motion Animation With Stop Motion Animation you can make a motion picture in which objects appear to be moving by making a recording each time you move a doll etc in small increments and then splicing the recordings together e With this unit pictures of 1 to 50 frames have to be taken per second of a motion picture e For smoother motion record movement in as small increments as possible and set the frame rate per second frame rate to a large value 1 Select the menu KAN Rec Stop Motion Animation O ARG Press A F to select the recording method and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval When hake the shutter button is pressed fully recording starts ooting OFF This is for taking pictures manually frame by frame Only when Auto Shooting is set to ON Shootin Sets the interval for automatic recording A value between 1 and I 60 seconds can be set in 1 second intervals Interval
170. e To take pictures in an intended scene it is recommended that you take pictures in the appropriate Recording Mode E About the flash Flash mode is set to when the flash is closed and j 4 AUTO when it is open When the flash is open the camera automatically sets i44 i 4 AUTO Red Eye Reduction i 3 or i5 to match the type of subject and brightness e Open the flash when the flash is to be used P217 e When i amp or i 3 is set Red Eye Removal is enabled e Shutter speed will be slower during i 3 or j E Functions that work automatically The following functions are performed automatically to allow the camera to make the optimal settings Scene Detection Backlight Compensation Face Detection Auto White Balance Intelligent ISO sensitivity control Red Eye Removal i Resolution i Dynamic Long Shtr NR Shading Comp Quick AF AF Assist Lamp Recording Modes 4 E Menus that can be set O Only the following menus can be set ar 4 Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Menu Item 5 Photo Style Aspect Ratio Picture Size Quality Burst Rate Auto YI Bracket Self Timer Time Lapse Shot Stop Motion Animation Electronic Rec Shutter Shutter Delay Ex Tele Conv Color Space Stabilizer Face Recog Profile Setup Motion sick i Refer to Using the Motion Picture Menu on P235 Picture Silent Mode Half Press Release AFS AF
171. e centre of the screen e Remove the lens hood e When you do not want to use the AF Assist Lamp e g when taking pictures of animals in dark places set the AF Assist Lamp to OFF In this case it will become more difficult to focus on the subject e The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked and it may become harder to focus when a lens with large diameter is used e The setting for the AF Assist Lamp is fixed to OFF in the following cases Distinct Scenery Bright Blue Sky Romantic Sunset Glow Vivid Sunset Glow Glistening Water Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Scene Guide Mode Fo Recording not recording even when focus is not achieved Wa Custom Focus Release Priority FOCUS You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus RELEASE This gives priority to the best time to take a picture so you can take a picture when the shutter button is pressed fully e Keep in mind that when RELEASE is set focus may not be achieved even if the focus mode lever is set to AF e Focus Release Priority is disabled during motion picture recording Fo Adjusting not adjusting the focus manually after achieving Auto Focus CAN Custom AF MF ON OFF When AF Lock is ON press the shutter button halfway with the AFS AFF AFC set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF AE LOCK you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually
172. e even if charged e When storing the battery for a long period of time we recommend charging it once a year Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged e We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant silica gel when you keep it in a closet or a cabinet e Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long period of time i About the picture data e Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate handling Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data e Images recorded or edited with the camera may not be played back correctly on other devices and applied effects may not appear on the devices Also images recorded on other devices may not be played back on the camera and functions of the camera may not be available for the images About tripods or unipods e When you use a tripod make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it e You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod e Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching the camera You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when turning it Also the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod e When using this unit with a l
173. e focus ring with a dry dustless cloth e Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner alcohol kitchen detergents etc to clean the camera since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off e When using a chemical cloth be sure to follow the accompanying instructions E About dirt on the image sensor This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera body when changing lenses Depending on the recording conditions dirt on the image sensor may appear on the recorded picture To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body avoid changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it Dust reduction function This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on but if you see dust perform the Sensor Cleaning P60 in the Setup menu Removing dirt on the image sensor The image sensor is very precise and delicate so be sure to observe the following when you do have to clean it yourself e Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower brush Be careful not to blow too strongly e Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount e Do not let the blow
174. e into focus e When the interchangeable lens H HO20A is used AFF and AFC cannot be set P147 230 uv Motion Picture 4 Recording Motion Picture Applicable modes AAt P A S Men C1 C2 C3 seul 1 Start recording by pressing the motion picture button a Elapsed recording time Available recording time e Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode is possible e The recording state indicator red will flash while recording motion pictures e If approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed part of the display will disappear Press DISP or touch the monitor to make the display reappear e When recording a motion picture do not cover the microphone with your fingers or other objects e Release the motion picture button right after you press it 2 Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again e Still picture recording is also possible during the motion picture recording by fully pressing the shutter button P233 Fo Enabling disabling the motion picture button CA Custom Video Button ON OFF e This function is for preventing accidental operation of the button Fo Switching between the angle of view for taking pictures and the one for recording motion pictures DW Custom Rec Area gt O Picture Q8 Motion picture e When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures the angle
175. e subject the set colour may not be left in i Sunshine This effect adds a cast of light to the scene Items that can be set Yellow tone Red tone Blue tone White tone e Select the colour tone by rotating the rear dial and then press MENU SET 2 Recording Modes E Setting the light source You can change the position and size of the light source A 2 Press Fn2 to display the setting screen e Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of A then 3 Press A V lt gt to move the centre position of the light source e The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen e The centre of the light source can be moved to the edge of the screen O Point for when placing the centre of the light source A more natural appearance can be created by placing the centre of the light source outside the image Adjust the size of the light source by rotating the rear dial e It can be changed to 4 different sizes e The display can also be enlarged reduced by pinching out pinching in e Pressing DISP or touching Reset returns the light source setting to the default setting Press MENU SET to set e You can also set by touching Set e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping Recording Modes A Recording motion pictures with manually set apert
176. e the information of the registered person 2 3 Press V to select MEMORY and press MENU SET Press A V lt P to select the face image to edit or delete and then press MENU SET Press A V to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Info Edit Changing the information of an already registered person Perform step 4 in Face Settings The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for higher priority faces Prioniy Press A V lt 4 gt to select the priority and then press MENU SET Deleting information of a registered person Delete e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e Exit the menu after it is set u Recording Profiles of Babies and Pets on Images Applicable modes eP A S M By setting the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance you can record their name and age in months and years on images You can display them during playback or stamp them on recorded images using Text Stamp P251 E Setting Age or Name 1 Select the menu My gt Rec gt Profile Setu 2 Settings amp Baby1 Baby2 4x Pet OFF SET Press A V to select SET and then press MENU SET Press A V to select Baby1 Baby2 or Pet and then press MENU SET Press A V to select Age or Name and then press MENU SET Press A V to select SET and then press MENU SET Enter Age birthd
177. e tint 1 Select the settings by pressing A V and adjust with lt gt e Adjusting can also be performed by rotating the rear dial 2 Press MENU SET to set e It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use e Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor However this does not affect the recorded pictures O oO Preparation d Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level AX AUTO The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera Monitor Luminance 1 MODE1 Make the monitor brighter 2k MODE2 Set the monitor to the standard brightness 3k MODE3 Make the monitor darker e The brightness of pictures displayed on the monitor is enhanced so some subjects on the monitor may appear different from the actual subjects However this enhancement does not affect recorded pictures e The monitor automatically returns to standard brightness if no operations are performed for 30 seconds when recording in MODE1 It will light up brightly again with button or touch operation e When AUTO or MODE1 is set the usage time is reduced e AUTO is only available in the Recording Mode e The initial setting when using the AC adaptor optional is MODE2 u Preparation The unit can be set up to prevent unnecessary battery consumption You can set up the unit to
178. ed when displayed in 2D OO OO u Connecting to other equipment e When a picture recorded in 3D is displayed on this unit it is played back in 2D conventional image e A black screen is displayed for a few seconds when switching playback back and forth from 3D to 2D pictures e When you select a 3D picture thumbnail it may take a few seconds for playback to start After playback the thumbnail display may take a few seconds to reappear e When viewing 3D pictures your eyes may become tired if you are too close to the television screen e lf your television does not switch to a 3D picture make the necessary settings on the TV For details refer to the operating instructions of the TV e 3D pictures can be saved to your computer or Panasonic devices P320 325 S9 ak D Connecingtotnerequoment o Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen O Pictures recorded with this unit can be played back on a TV screen C Preparations Turn this unit and the TV off e Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals Image quality may vary with the connected terminals os High quality HDMI socket Video socket 1 Connect the camera and a TV e Check the direction of the terminals and plug in out straight holding onto the plug It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or in wrong direction 0 To connect wi
179. ed when pictures are taken in the following situations After No Reset P59 in the Setup menu has been executed When a card containing a folder with the same folder number has been inserted such as when pictures were taken using another maker of camera When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder E Connection in the PTP Mode Set USB Mode to PictBridge PTP e Data can now be read only from the card in the PC e When there are 1000 or more pictures on a card the pictures may not be imported in the PTP Mode e Motion picture cannot be played back in PTP Mode 324 u Connecting to other equipment Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a Recorder If you insert card holding content recorded with this unit into a Panasonic recorder you can dub the content to a Blu ray Disc or DVD etc t Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other al devices will vary depending on the file format JPEG RAW MPO AVCHD or MP4 e See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and playing back E Dubbing with non compatible equipment You can dub the content played back using this unit to non compatible equipment such as recorders and video players by connecting this unit to the non compatible equipment using an AV cable optional Non compatible equipment will be able to play back the content This is convenient
180. eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeanees 276 e Sending location information to the camera from a smartphone tablet 276 e Sending images to a smartphone tablet by controlling the camera 211 Displaying pictures ON a TV erine a aE EEA 280 When sending images to Printer scccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneseennesenaes 281 When sending images to AV device cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseueneseaaes 282 When Sending images to PC m ocsnene da ae a a N 285 Using WeD SCIVICCS oan aen a e E E A e 289 e When sending images to web service c scccceserenenerenenerceesenseneneueres 289 e When sending images to Cloud Sync Service ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 293 Registering to the LUMIX CLUB ee aee Ea aA EEEa aeaa 295 Aboutthe UMC CEUB I a r 295 e Configuring the external AV device settings ccccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 ADOU COMMCCEONS e a sree ec eee 301 e Connecting from your house via the network cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 e Connecting from a location away from your house direct connection 304 e Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones Select a destination from History Select a destination from Favorite 305 About settings for sending IMAGES cccccsecccssesseeesseeseeesseseeesseeseeessees 307 WER Setup Menu a a iaeeeee sen itrrenre een sp auer nent eree cr eerrepeer eee etree 309 Connect
181. eeeeeeeneseeeneneeeneneeneees 12 PRO OULU Me LenS ea e a T E E 20 Preparation Changing the LENS oo eaea a a a a T A E sume seaeee core neeceners 22 Attaching the Shoulder Strap ccccccesseeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseesseeeneeesees 25 Charging the Battery aama e E E en oweneest 26 Ol ais cellis eee ero ec oar on er ere eee ae 26 e Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures 28 Inserting and Removing the Card optional EI VO ES EEG WY ccc eects a voces eee ce eee A a ece corre en es cantar E a A eee 32 PADOU CTH ANG rose access id echoes each aah oe or eee eee a een eee 34 e About cards that can be used with this Unit cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 34 Formatting the card initlaliSatlOnieemesercn atc sce rica yee et core nates eee 35 e Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording time 36 setting Date Time Clock Set oriona aa aa aada eaaa aa aaa 38 Changingsthe Clock Setting ao e 6 hye ae tee ee 39 seting he Ment onran a ter ccursaccasvaas teuseneniWe sae veauesser caterer recuu rd acuaansa weenie 40 SOLEM GMOMU AGING cae a a a E mun teria calor aucincee saan acinar cas 40 Calling frequently used menus instantly GOUT INNS AU a a reenact seed acon te per E cc eemre nie eceeec ee or est 43 e Change the Quick Menu to your preferred It M cccccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeaees 45 Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons function b
182. en a lens based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard is in use a focal length is set automatically e lf your lens is based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard but does not have a communication function with the camera set the focal length of the lens Preparations Set the Shoot w o Lens to ON P23 1 Select the menu 2 Press A V to select Focal Length Set and then press MENU SET 3 Select the focal length of your lens with lt gt e A focal length ranging from 8 mm to 1000 mm can be set Focal Length e Set a focal length written on the body of your lens etc lt 2T 4s If the focal length setting for your lens is not found select a eT value close to the focal length of your lens e If your lens is a zoom lens select a value according to the focal length at the time of recording 4 Press MENU SET 24mm 35mm 50mm E Registering a focal length 1 Perform step 3 in Setting the focal length of a lens 2 Press V 3 Press lt gt to select the focal length to be overwritten and then press DISP Focal Length 35mm e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Up to 3 focal length settings can be registered e Exit the menu after it is set DISP Memory E Setting a registered focal length 1 Onthe screen in step 3 of Setting the focal length of a lens press V 2 Press lt gt to select the regi
183. en press MENU SET engl Single Burst L single atence Settings 2 burst 0 3 1 3 B 3 pictures 3 2 3 3 pictures 3 1 3 pictures 5 1 3 5 pictures Step 5 2 3 5 1 5 pictures 7 1 3 7 pictures 72 3 7 pictures 7 1 7 pictures e You can take one picture at a time when set to _ e You can continuously take pictures up to set numbers when set to H J e Exit the menu after it is set 5 pictures Shutter Drive Settings O e When taking pictures using Auto Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value the SS pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value B Not available in these cases z7 e The exposure may be compensated incorrectly depending on the brightness of the subject e Auto Bracket is disabled in the following cases gt Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Soft Image of a Flower Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Miniature Effect Soft Focus Star Filter Sunshine Creative Control Mode When White Balance Bracket is set When recording motion pictures When recording using the flash When HDR is set to ON Multi Exp When using Time Lapse Shot In Stop Motion Animation only when Auto Shooting is set Shutter Drive Settings Taking Pictures with the Self timer Applicable modes y eu P A S M
184. enlarging the screen e The focus position cannot be set at the edge of the screen 1 Select and press V 2 Press A W lt gt to set the focus position and then press MENU SET e The assist screen for setting the focus position is displayed in an enlarged size e The assist screen can also be displayed by touching the subject 3 Move to the focus position with A W lt gt e The focus position can also be moved by touching the screen e Pressing DISP will bring the focus position back to the centre of the assist screen e On the assist screen it is also possible to record a picture by touching XII E Changing the display of the assist screen Each time the rear dial is pressed an enlarged display switches between a windowed screen display and a full screen display e The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching Il e If the front dial or rear dial is rotated the display can be enlarged reduced up to approximately 3 to 6 times when the enlarged display is in a windowed display or up to approximately 3 to 10 times when the enlarged display is in a full screen display The rear dial enlarges reduces the size at a rate of 1 time and the front dial enlarges reduces it at a rate of 0 1 times e The display can also be enlarged reduced by pinching out pinching in amp 2 Focus and Exposure Settings Fo Setting the duration for which the screen is enlarged CAN Custom
185. enu e Silent Mode P195 e Guide Line P73 e AFS AFF AFC P146 e Rec Area P231 e Peaking P160 e Step Zoom P214 e Histogram P73 Fn7 e Zoom Speed P214 x Function button settings at the time of purchase At the time of purchase function button settings are not assigned to Fn8 and Fn9 e Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the function button u Preparation E Configuring the function button settings from the on monitor recording information screen Touching Fn on the on monitor recording information screen P71 also allows you to display the screen in step 3 E Using function buttons with touch operations Fn5 Fn6 Fn7 Fn8 and Fn9 are used by touching function buttons Touch f Touch Fn5 Fn6 Fn7 Fn8 or Fn9 The assigned function will operate e Some functions cannot be used depending on the mode or displayed screen e When set to Focus Area Set it is possible to display the position setting screen of either AF area or MF Assist e When Restore to Default is set function button settings return to the default configuration T2 Not available in these cases Fn2 cannot be used in the following cases Miniature Effect One Point Color Sunshine Creative Control Mode Multi Exp e Fn3 cannot be used during Time Lapse Shooting Fn5 Fn6 Fn7 Fn8 and Fn9 cannot be used when the viewfinder
186. er brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched e Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor e lf you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower consult the dealer or Panasonic E For care of the eye cup on the viewfinder e As the eye cup cannot be removed gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth and be careful not to remove it e lf you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed consult the dealer or Panasonic 372 pomes CY O i About the Monitor Viewfinder eS e Do not press the monitor with excessive force Uneven colours may appear on the monitor and it may malfunction ST e lf the camera is cold when you turn it on the picture on the Monitor Viewfinder will be slightly darker than usual at first However the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal 5 temperature of the camera increases S Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor Viewfinder screen However there may be some dark or bright spots red blue or green on the screen This is not a malfunction Though the Monitor Viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision technology some pixels may be inactive or always lit The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card i About the Lens e Do not press the lens with excessive force e Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it
187. es e If approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed part of the display will disappear Press DISP or touch the monitor to make the display reappear e When recording a motion picture do not cover the microphone with your fingers or other objects e Release the motion picture button right after you press it 2 Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again u pee o Selecting the Recording Mode Select the mode by rotating the mode dial e Rotate the mode dial slowly to select the desired mode Intelligent Auto Mode P82 The subjects are recorded using settings automatically selected by the camera fw Intelligent Auto Plus Mode P82 Allows you to adjust the brightness and colour hue when in Intelligent Auto Mode P Programme AE Mode P89 Records at the aperture value and shutter speed set by the camera A Aperture Priority AE Mode P92 The shutter speed is automatically determined by the aperture value you set S Shutter Priority AE Mode P93 The aperture value is automatically determined by the shutter speed you set M Manual Exposure Mode P94 The exposure is adjusted by the aperture value and the shutter speed which are manually adjusted u peso CY mM Creative Video Mode P125 Records motion pictures with a manually set aperture value and shutter speed x You cannot take still pictures C1C2 C3 Custom Mode P128 Use thi
188. es Stored in the Camera e Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device e For information on the playback of images check the web service e For details on how to send images refer to P307 289 Wi Fi NFC O Preparations You need to register to LUMIX CLUB P295 to send a picture to a web service E To send images to a web service you need to register the web service P289 Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu 3 Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording P291 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera P292 e Images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera Check images by accessing the web service with your smartphone tablet or computer e lf sending images fails a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address registered with LUMIX CLUB e Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user such as a title the time and date when the images was taken and the location where the image was taken Check this information before uploading images to web services e Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage loss etc of images uploaded on web services e When uploading images to the web service do not delete images from this camera even after they have finished sending until you have checked t
189. es your photo a dramatic contrast look Items that can be set Black and white Pop colours e If this image effect is selected with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode seams between pictures may become visible Recording Modes High Dynamic This effect produces the optimum brightness for both dark and bright parts ee Items that can be set Black and white s Pop colours j Cross Process This effect gives your photo a dramatic colour look Items that can be set Green tone Blue tone Yellow tone Red tone Select the desired colour tone by rotating the rear dial and then press MENU SET s mmoj amp Toy Effect This effect reduces peripheral brightness to give the impression of a toy camera Items that can be set olour Orange AD Blue emphasised oe emphasised _ Cc Recording Modes Toy Pop This effect creates a vivid and bright image with the look of a toy camera O Items that can be set Area with reduced peripheral B brightness This effect gives a higher contrast and a lower saturation to create a calm and tranquil picture Bleach Bypass Items that can be set Contrast Low contrast lt gt High contrast Recording Modes This effect blurs peripheral areas to give the impression of a diorama ga F Understated l Pop ta 8 Freshness gt ag colours colours E Setting the type of defocus With
190. ess of the recorded image in the Auto Review or playback screen e The set exposure value is memorised even if the camera is turned off Not available in these cases e The compensation range of the exposure will be limited depending on the brightness of the subject u Focus and Exposure Settings Selecting the Method for Measuring Brightness Metering Mode Applicable modes PJ A S M J esmi c1 C2 c3 Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed CKA Rec Metering Mode Settings Description of settings This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable Multiple exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically Usually we recommend using this method 0 This is the method used to focus on the subject on the centre of the Centre weighted screen and measure the whole screen evenly CJ This is the method to measure the subject in the Spot spot metering target e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed Focus and Exposure Settings Making Multiple Exposures on One Picture Multi Exp Applicable modes P A S M You can shoot up to four exposures per image 5 1 Select the menu A gt Rec gt Multi Exp 2 Press A F to select Start and then press MENU SET
191. ested minimum subject distance is 0 6 m 2 0 feet e Be careful not to shake the camera while in a vehicle or walking O e It is recommended to use a tripod or a flash to record steady pictures e Up to approx 490 3D pictures can be recorded on a 2 GB card When the aspect ratio is set to 4 3 and the quality is set to EI sts e Read the operating instructions of the 3D interchangeable lens for details Not available in these cases e You cannot record 3D pictures in vertical orientation e When a distance to the subject is 0 6 m 2 0 feet to approximately 1 m 3 3 feet horizontal disparity becomes too great and you may not see the 3D effect at the edges of the image Q9 ne U Connecting to other equipment E Functions that cannot be used during 3D recording When recording with the 3D interchangeable lens H FT012 optional the following feature will be disabled Recording functions e Auto Focus Manual Focus operation e Aperture setting e Zoom operation e Recording motion pictures e Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode e Rough Monochrome Impressive Art High Dynamic Toy Effect Toy Pop Star Filter One Point Color Sunshine Creative Control Mode e Defocus control function x1 The motion picture button Creative Video Mode and the Motion Picture menu will be unavailable or unusable Rec menu e Picture Size
192. ewfinder manually Press LVF The Viewfinder lights only when your eye or an object is moved closer to it LVF Fn4 button can be used in two ways as LVF or as Fn4 function 4 At the time of purchase it is initially set to LVF Monitor Switch e Refer to P47 for details about the function button E Diopter adjustment Slide the diopter adjustment lever so that the characters displayed in the viewfinder can be seen clearly O B ese CY About the Eye Sensor AF If Eye Sensor AF in the Custom menu is set to ON the camera automatically adjusts the focus as the eye sensor is activated Beep sounds are not emitted when the focus is achieved in Eye Sensor AF T2 Not available in these cases e Eye Sensor AF may not work in dimly lit conditions e The Eye Sensor AF feature is disabled in the following conditions With lenses that only offer Manual Focus With some Four Thirds lenses Setting the focus position with the Touch Pad By setting Touch Pad AF in Touch Settings P17 of the Custom menu you can operate the Monitor as a touch pad when displaying the Viewfinder Item Description of settings Moves the AF area of the Viewfinder by touching a desired position IEXACTI on the Touch Pad Moves the AF area of the Viewfinder by dragging P16 the Touch Pad OFF OFFSET e Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position If you press
193. f AFS has been set In this case the display will change to the yellow AFS e The focus indication is displayed as AA in a dark environment and focusing may take longer than usual peso CY nay 3 Press the shutter button fully push it in further and take the picture O e f you zoom in out after focusing on a subject the focus may lose its accuracy In that case re adjust the focus e The focus range is different depending on the lens used When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used 0 2 m 0 66 feet to When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used 0 2 m 0 66 feet Wide to focal length 20 mm to 0 3 m 0 98 feet focal length 21 mm to Tele to OQ Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus e Fast moving subjects extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast e When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects e When it is dark or when jitter occurs e When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near subjects Fo Setting the duration for which a picture is displayed after taking it UNM Custom Auto Review gt HOLD 5SEC 4SEC 3SEC 2SEC 1SEC OFF HOLD The pictures are displayed until shutter button is pressed halfway e Switching of the display of the playback screen deleting pictures etc can be performed during Auto Review e Auto Review does not work
194. f the subject and then automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to suit the movement of the subject and brightness of the scene to minimise the jitter of the subject eean e Maximum ISO3200 With the flash on IS01600 e The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway It is continuously changing to match the movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed fully The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings 125 200 400 800 1600 3200 When the ISO Increments in Rec menu P176 is set to 6400 12800 25600 1 3 EV items of ISO sensitivity that can be set will increase x1 When the ISO Limit Set P176 of Rec menu is set to anything except OFF it is set automatically within the value set in ISO Limit Set 2 Only available when Extended ISO is set O Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity 200 25600 A a E When it is light outdoors When it is dark Shutter speed Slow Fast Noise Less Increased Jitter of the subject Increased Less e For the focus range of flash when AUTO is set refer to P217 e When Electronic Shutter is set to ON the ISO sensitivity can be set up to ISO 3200 e When Direct Focus Area P155 is set to ON the operations on the cursor buttons translate to movements of the AF area Set using the Quick Menu P43 e Setting items below will be selectable in Creative Video Mode AUTO 200 to 3200 Focus and E
195. following icons are displayed External flash Forced ON S External flash Slow Sync External flash Forced OFF e Signal flashing with wireless flashes is also disabled vu s CY When using other commercially available external flashes without communication functions with the camera DMC GX7 e It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash If you want to use the external flash in Auto Mode use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO sensitivity to match the settings on the camera e Set to Aperture Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash The exposure cannot be compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter Priority AE Mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Programme AE Mode because the aperture value cannot be fixed e You can set the aperture value the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even when attaching the external flash e Some commercial external flashes have synchro terminals with high voltage or reversed polarity Using such extra flashes may cause a malfunction or the camera may not operate normally e lf you use commercially available external flashes with communication functions other than the dedicated one they may not operate normally or they may be damaged Do not use them e Even if the ex
196. for further details on how to operate e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 e Caution Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy the likeness rights etc of the subject when you use this function Use at your own risk e lf you have changed the clock setting of this unit or the smartphone tablet after Time sync perform Time sync again e On the smartphone tablet you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the transfer status of location information Refer to Help in the Image App menu for details e When using Image App for iOS If you press the Home or On Off button of a smartphone tablet while Rec loc Info is working location information recording is stopped Not available in these cases e The smartphone tablet may fail to acquire location information in China and the border area in the neighbouring countries of China As of August 2013 276 u Wi Fi NFC d Sending images to a smartphone tablet by controlling the camera E Methods for sending and images that can be sent Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera e Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device e For information on the playback of images check the operating instructions of the destination device e For details on how to send images refer to
197. formation about the icons displayed on the touch screen refer to Monitor Display Viewfinder Display on P334 Not available in these cases e The touch panel may not function normally in the following cases When touched by a gloved hand When touched by a wet hand water or hand cream etc When the touch panel is wet When you use a commercially available monitor protect sheet When touched by multiple hands or fingers at the same time Fo Enabling disabling the touch operation CA Custom Touch Settings e When set to OFF no corresponding touch tab or touch icon is displayed on the screen Item Description of settings All touch operations When set to OFF only button and dial operations Touch Screen can be used ON OFF Operation to display the touch icons by touching tabs such as Q Touch Tab displayed on the right of the screen ON OFF Operation to optimise the focus or both the focus and brightness for a Touch AF _ touched subject AF P153 AF AE P172 OFF Touch Pad Using the monitor as a touch pad when the viewfinder is in use P64 AF EXACT OFFSET OFF Bewese CY i Rear Dial Front Dial a kd There are 2 ways to operate the rear dial rotating left or right and deciding by pressing The front dial is operated by rotating it to the left or right SS Rotating Selection of items or setting of values is performed during the various settings 5 P
198. frames are dropping e Star filter used in this mode may cause glistening effects on the objects other than water surface I Clear Nightscape Colour saturation of the night light is increased to accentuate the nightscape O Tips y We recommend using a tripod and the self timer Gerem a A ee e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is l due to signal processing and is not a malfunction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places I Cool Night Sky Blue tones are enhanced to create a cool and sophisticated image of the night sky after sunset Ae O Tips ox e We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places Warm Glowing Nightscape Recording Modes The warm colour tone creates a warm image of the nightscape O Tips We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places Artistic Nightscape A slow shutter speed captures light trails that can creates an artistic nightscape e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is due to signal processing and is not a malfu
199. frames are dropping e The focus range is different depending on lens used Refer to About the focus distance reference mark on P163 for the focus range e When a subject is close to the camera the effective focus range is significantly narrowed Therefore if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject it may become difficult to focus on it again e Close up regions are prioritised when taking pictures and so time is required to focus if you take a picture of a distant subject e When you take pictures at close range the resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly This is not a malfunction e If the lens becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust the lens may not be able to focus on the subject correctly Recording Modes Appetizing Food t m The overall screen brightness is increased to make the food look appealing O Tips e If you are using a lens with the zoom function you can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the distance between the camera and the subject e For close up recording we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it Cute Dessert The overall screen brightness is set higher to enhance the cuteness of the dessert Tips Or are using a lens with the zoom function you can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the distance between the camera and the su
200. g Shutter Delay Shutter Drive Settings Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket Applicable modes ev P A S M Maximum of 7 pictures will be recorded with different exposure settings following the Exposure Compensation range every time the shutter button is pressed O D With Auto Bracket Step 3 1 3 Sequence 0 1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture 1 3 EV 1 Press Y Sy 2 Press to lt gt to select the Auto Bracket icon 3 3 etc and then press A 3 Press lt gt to select the compensation range and then press MENU SET DA PARAE 1 71 3 7 1 4 Focus on the subject and take a picture RED eke afs Ea e If you press and hold the shutter button the number of pictures that you set is taken The Auto Bracket indication blinks until the number of pictures that you set is taken e The picture count is reset to 0 if you change the Auto Bracket setting or turn the camera off before all the pictures that you set are taken Shutter Drive Settings a E Cancelling the Auto Bracket Yy Select single picture recording or EA from among the drive modes P178 SS E Changing the settings for Single Burst Settings Step and Sequence in Auto Bracket 1 Select the menu CA Rec Auto Bracket 2 Press A F to select Single Burst Settings Step or Sequence and then press MENU SET 3 Press A F to select the setting and th
201. g is performed based on the adjustment values for the White Balance fine adjustment and 3 pictures with different colours are automatically recorded when the shutter button is pressed once 1 Fine adjust the White Balance in step 2 of Finely adjusting the White Balance and then perform the bracket setting by rotating the rear dial Rotating the rear dial to the right Horizontal A to B Rotating the rear dial to the left Vertical G to M e You can also set the bracket by touching gt 2 Press MENU SET e BKT is displayed in White Balance icon in the screen when the White Balance Bracket is set e The White Balance Bracket setting is released when this unit has been turned off including Sleep Mode e You will only hear the shutter sound once Not available in these cases e The White Balance Bracket does not work in the following cases Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Soft Image of a Flower Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode When recording motion pictures When Quality is set to RAWs s RAW or RAW When HDR is set to ON Multi Exp When using Time Lapse Shot image and Picture Quay setings S Setting the Picture Quality and Size Setting the aspect ratio of pictures Applicable modes mM PASM This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback method U CAm Rec Aspect
202. g played back is not rotated or is rotated in an unexpected direction when displayed e You can display the pictures without being rotated when Rotate Disp P259 is set to OFF e You can rotate pictures with the Rotate function P259 The picture is not played back There are no recorded pictures e Did you press gt e Is the card inserted e Is there a picture on the card e Is this a folder or picture which was processed in the PC If it is it cannot be played back by this unit It is recommended to use the PHOTOfunSTUDIO software in the CD ROM supplied to write pictures from PC to card e Has Playback Mode been set for playback Change to Normal Play P245 The folder number and the file number are displayed as and the screen turns black e Is this a non standard picture a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which was taken by another make of digital camera e Did you remove the battery immediately after picture taking or did you take the picture using a battery with a low remaining charge Format the data to delete the pictures mentioned above P60 Other pictures will be deleted as well and it will not be possible to restore them Therefore check well before formatting 362 O oO fomes CY Playback sound or operation sound is too low e ls something covering up the speaker P13 Images with different date as recorded date are played back
203. ge the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 You cannot change the settings while sending pictures Wait until sending is complete 278 Wi Fi NFC 1 Select the menu O Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera G Mi New Connection Send Images Stored in the Camera Smartphone 2 Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 On your smartphone tablet When connecting with Via Network Turn on the Wi Fi function Select the wireless access point you want to connect to and set Start Image App P269 When connecting with Wi Fi Direct or WPS Connection in Direct Start Image App P269 When connecting with Manual Connection in Direct Turn on the Wi Fi function Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit and then enter the password Start Image App P269 3 Select a device you want to connect e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Select Single Select or Multi Select e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 Single Select setting Select the picture Select Set Multi Select setting Select the picture repeat The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected again Select OK The number of pictures that can be sent by Multi Select is limited e Confirmation sc
204. ge to send P277 281 282 285 289 293 Connection failed Please retry in a few minutes Network disconnected Transfer stopped e Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point e There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time Try again after a while e Depending on the wireless access point connection may be automatically disconnected after specific time has passed Reconnect the connection again 343 u fomes CY Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up on downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones e Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered e Perform Cloud Sync setting Configure the settings on a PC with PHOTOfunSTUDIO or ona smartphone tablet with Image App Refer to P293 for details on Cloud Sync Service Connection failed e Check following regarding the smartphones tablet you intend to connect gt The smartphone tablet does not operate gt Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone tablet Wi Fi settings to this camera gt There is no free storage space on the smartphone tablet Login failed Please check Login ID and Password e Login ID or password for the LUMIX CLUB is not correct Please enter it again If you have forgotten the login ID or the password there
205. ght places The camera becomes warm e The surface of the camera and the reverse side of the monitor may become warm during use This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera The clock is reset lf you do not use the camera for a long time the clock may be reset Please set the clock message will be displayed please reset the clock P38 The file numbers are not recorded consecutively e When you perform an operation after taking a certain action the pictures may be recorded in folders with different numbers from the ones used prior to the operation The file numbers are recorded with previously used numbers e If you insert or remove the battery before turning off this unit the folder and file numbers for the pictures taken will not be stored in the memory When this unit is turned on again and pictures are taken they may be stored under file numbers which should have been assigned to previous pictures 370 u Others Cautions for Use Optimal use of the camera Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment such as microwave ovens TVs video games etc e If you use this unit on top of or near a TV the pictures and or sound on this unit may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation e Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting the pictures and or sound e Recorded data may be damaged or pictures may be distorted b
206. gin screen of LUMIX CLUB http umixclub panasonic net eng c do not have a wireless access point at my home but would like to perform service user registration of the LUMIX CLUB e Service user registration for the LUMIX CLUB is not possible in the environment without a wireless access point Images cannot be transmitted to a PC e When the firewall of the OS security software etc is enabled connecting to the PC may not be possible Images cannot be transmitted to the web service Confirm that the login information login ID user name email address password is correct e Web service server or the network may be busy Try again after a while Check the site of the web service you are sending the image to It takes time to transmit an image to the web service e Is the size of the image too large Reduce the image size at Size P308 and then send Transmit after dividing the motion picture with Video Divide P254 e lt may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far Transmit closer to the wireless access point 365 amp 2 fomes CY The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the web service is not there e Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image t may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the web service depending on the status of the server Wait for a while
207. global cs dsc download When using this lens with another make of digital cameras the Optical Image Stabiliser function will not work As of August 2013 For details contact the respective company The flash is not activated e ls the flash closed Slide the flash open lever to open the flash P217 e Is Electronic Shutter set to ON When Electronic Shutter is set to ON the flash is not activated P196 e Is Silent Mode set to ON When Silent Mode is set to ON the flash is not activated P195 The flash is activated 2 times e Except for when Firing Mode in Flash is set to MANUAL The flash is activated 2 times The interval between the first and second flash is longer when Red Eye Reduction P219 is set so the subject should not move until the second flash is activated 360 amp 2 Monitor Viewfinder es CY The Monitor Viewfinder turns off although the camera is turned on e lf no operations are performed during the set time period Auto Monitor Off P55 is activated and the Monitor turns off e When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor the Monitor display may switch to the Viewfinder display P63 The Monitor Viewfinder is too bright or dark e Check Monitor Luminance setting P54 e Perform Monitor Display Viewfinder P53 It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly for an instant e
208. group P240 u 1 Press V Sy 2 Press lt gt to select the burst icon H etc and then press A e9 S Ga 4 5 4 More settings 3 Select the burst speed with lt gt and then press MENU SET eg wees Shutter Drive Settings SH M Super high i Middle L Low speed Burst Electronic 10 4 2 speed shutter ON 40 ow a ictures i gt nutter OF os foa U second shutter OFF SINE meaner ey Suni Available Available With RAW files g 3 4 1 Suet RAW Depends on the capacity of the card files x1 Number of recordable pictures 2 The electronic shutter will operate x3 Depending on the recording conditions the number of frames in a burst may be reduced For example when you set i Resolution of the recording menu the number of frames in a burst may be reduced k4 Pictures can be taken until the capacity of the card becomes full However the burst speed will become slower halfway The exact timing of this depends on the aspect ratio the picture size the setting for the quality and the type of card used e The Burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings Picture Size P139 Quality P140 Sensitivity P174 AFS AFF AFC P147 Focus Release Priority P157 e Burst speed can also be set with Burst Rate in the Rec menu e Refer to P140 for information about RAW files 4 Focus on the subject a
209. hat they have been properly uploaded to the web service Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit 290 pwiemro CY O i Registering web services When sending images to web services the web service being used must be registered with the LUMIX CLUB STZ e Check the FAQ Contact us on the following site for compatible web services http lumixclub panasonic net eng c lumix_faqs 4 Preparation Y7 Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use and have the login information available 1 Connect to the LUMIX CLUB site using a smartphone tablet or computer http lumixclub panasonic net eng c 2 Enter your LUMIX CLUB login ID and password and log in to the service P295 3 Register your email address 4 Select the web service to be used and register it e Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording 1 Select the menu M gt New Connection gt Send Images While Recording Web service 2 Select Via Network and connect P301 3 Select a web service you want to connect e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Take pictures e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 You cannot change the settings while send
210. he smartphone tablet to 6 of this unit e It may take time to complete the connection When the smartphone tablet has connected an image of this camera will be displayed on the smartphone tablet e If a connection attempt by touching fails restart the Image App and then display the screen in step 1 again e If a connection is established during single picture playback the picture will be transferred to the smartphone tablet P275 212 O Wi Fi NFC O When connecting for the first time the connection confirmation screen is displayed 1 When the connection confirmation screen is displayed on this unit select Yes 2 Touch the smartphoneltablet to 8 of the camera again The connected smartphone tablet is registered to this camera e You can register up to 20 smartphones tablets When the number exceeds 20 registrations will be deleted starting from the oldest touched one e Performing Reset Wi Fi Settings will delete the smartphone tablet registration e If the camera is not recognised even when touching the smartphone tablet change positions and try again e Do not touch the smartphone tablet to this camera strongly e For information on the operation and settings of NFC compatible smartphones tablets refer to the operating instructions of your device e If there is a metal object between this camera and the smartphone tablet reading may fail Also putting a sticker around the NFC area
211. he blurriness of the background while checking the screen 1 Press the rear dial to display the setting screen e Each press of the rear dial switches among brightness setting Defocus Control and end operation 2 Rotate the rear dial to set e Pressing 1 on the blurriness setting screen will cancel the setting Not available in these cases e In Miniature Effect of Creative Control Mode Defocus Control cannot be used _ _ ms Recording Modes d Setting brightness 1 Press the rear dial to display the setting screen e Each press of the rear dial switches among brightness setting Defocus Control and end operation O BE 2 Rotate the rear dial to set B saaa innl E Change the settings by using the touch panel Touch A Touch the item you want to set Eh Image effects Defocus level EA Brightness Drag the slide bar to set e Press MENU SET to return to the recording screen er O1 Recording Modes I Expressive This effect emphasises the colour to make a pop art picture O P Items that can be set a amp Understated PEN Pop oS Freshness colours colours Yellow P Red emphasised we emphasised Old Days This effect adds a bright soft and nostalgic feel to the overall image Items that can be set Contrast Low contrast gt High contrast High Key gt This effect adds a bright airy and soft fee
212. he folder number will then appear Select Yes to reset the folder number Reset The recording or setup custom settings are reset to the default e When the recording setting is reset the content of the following settings is also reset The Face Recog setting e When the setup custom settings are reset the following settings are also reset The World Time setting The settings of Travel Date departure date return date location The Profile Setup setting e The folder number and the clock setting are not changed Self Timer Auto Off amp 2 Preparation d Reset Wi Fi Settings Reset all settings in the Wi Fi menu to factory default settings e Always reset the camera when disposing or selling it to prevent personal information saved within the camera from being misused e Always reset the camera after making a copy of personal information when sending the camera in to be repaired x Excluding LUMIX CLUB P299 It will perform optimisation of imaging device and image Pixel Refresh processing e Imaging device and image processing is optimised when the camera is purchased Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded e Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to Sensor Cleaning the front of the imaging device is performed e Dust Reduction Function wi
213. he screen Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Soft Focus Star Filter If no image effect is to be added select No Effect Press MENU SET 2 Press the shutter button halfway to focus Recording Modes d Lt 3 Press the shutter button fully and move the camera in a small circle in the direction of the arrow on the screen Recording from left to right T p e Move the camera at a constant speed a Recording direction and panning Pictures may not be able to be recorded Guide properly if the camera is moved too fast or slow 4 Press the shutter button once again to end the still picture recording e Recording can also be ended by keeping the camera still while recording e Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide E Change the settings by using the touch panel e The recording direction and an image effect can also be set by touching I Recording direction ber Selects an image effect filter Bh Adjusts an image effect This is displayed only when an image effect is set Cale Adjusts an image effect This is displayed only when One Point Color is set Cis O O B Recording Modes E Technique for Panorama Shot Mode a Move the camera in the recording direction a itot shaking it If the camera shakes too much pictures may not be able to be A i recorded or the recorded panorama picture may become narrower smaller
214. hen the shutter button is pressed halfway e When using a lens having an aperture ring set the position of the aperture ring to A to activate the front rear dial settings At positions other than A the ring setting takes priority 92 Recording Modes Shutter Priority AE Mode When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject set with a faster shutter speed When you want to create a trail effect set to a slower shutter speed a 5 Set the mode dial to S Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the front dial a Shutter speed 60 125 250 509 10 Exposure meter 11 80 56 4 28 Shutter speed Shutter speed Slow Fast It becomes easier to It becomes easier to express movement freeze movement e It will switch between shutter speed setting operation and Exposure Compensation operation every time the rear dial is pressed e The effects of the set shutter speed will not be visible on the recording screen To check on the recording screen please use Preview P97 e The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ Check the pictures on the playback screen e Rotate the front rear dial to display the Expo Meter Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red e If the exposure is not adequate the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink when the shutter button is pressed halfway e We recommend using a tripod when the sh
215. hite Balance B You can finely adjust the White Balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by setting the White Balance 1 Select the White Balance and then press V 2 Press A W lt gt to fine adjust the White Balance e You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White Balance graph lt A AMBER ORANGE gt B BLUE BLUISH A G GREEN GREENISH V M MAGENTA REDDISH e Pressing DISP resets the position back to the centre 3 Press MENU SET e If you finely adjust the White Balance to A amber the White Balance icon on the screen will change to orange If you finely adjust the White Balance to B blue the White Balance icon on the screen will change to blue e If you finely adjust the White Balance to G green or M magenta green or magenta appears beside the White Balance icon on the screen e The White Balance fine adjustment setting is reflected in the picture when using the flash e You can finely adjust the White Balance independently for each White Balance item e The White Balance fine adjustment setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off e The White Balance fine adjustment level returns to the standard setting centre point in the following cases When you reset the White Balance in 4 or J When you reset the colour temperature manually in K Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 O White Balance Bracket oO Bracket settin
216. house direct connection You can select the method for connecting to the device you are using Search the WiFi SS Select the connection method supported by your device ee WPS Connection acy p Manual Connection B Connection method Description of settings 1 Set the device to Wi Fi Direct mode 2 Select Wi Fi Direct 3 Select the device to connect to e Read the operating instructions of your device for details WPS Push Button 1 Select WPS Push Button 2 Set the device to WPS mode e You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the DISP button on this unit WPS PIN code 1 Select WPS PIN code 2 Enter the PIN code of the device into this unit Wi Fi Direct WPS Connection Enter the SSID and password into the device The SSID and Enter the password password are displayed on the a a tot connection waiting screen of this TO i SSID unit Password aii i Manual Connection a 304 Wi Fi NFC 4 Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones Select a destination from History Select a destination from Favorite C When the Wi Fi function is used a record is saved in the history You can register records as favourites Connecting from the history or favourites allows you to easily connect with the same settings as the previous ones 1 Press Wi Fi 2 Select Select a destination from History or Select a destination from
217. hrow the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects such as necklaces hairpins etc e This can cause short circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a battery j Charger e The CHARGE indicator may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic wave This phenomenon has no effects on charging e lf you use the battery charger near a radio the radio reception may be disturbed e Keep the charger 1 m 3 3 feet or more away from radio e The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used This is not a malfunction e After use be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected e Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean 374 amp 2 s CY i About 3D E About 3D recording With the 3D interchangeable lens attached do not record a subject at less than the minimum focus distance e The 3D effects may be more pronounced and therefore cause tiredness or discomfort e When the 3D interchangeable lens H FT012 optional is used the minimum focus distance is 0 6 m 2 0 feet When recording with the 3D interchangeable lens attached be careful not to shake the unit e Tiredness or discomfort may result if the shake is pronounced due to riding in a vehicle or walking etc e We rec
218. icons indicate the modes available for a function e Black icons Applicable modes e Grey icons Unavailable modes c1 and will differ depending on the Recording Modes registered under custom settings e Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page e By entering keywords in the search field at the top of the Adobe Reader screen you can run a keyword search and jump to the corresponding page e Operations and other details of this manual may vary depending on the Adobe Reader version you are using E About the symbols in the text KENI MA Fo In these operating instructions steps for setting a menu item are described as follows Ua Rec gt Quality gt z2 Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing MENU SET button Indicates that the Wi Fi setting can be made by pressing Wi Fi button Configurations that can be performed in the Custom menu Tips for skilful use and points for recording Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used Continued to next page KES Vv Contents Finding the information YOU N C ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeesseaneeesseaeneeses 2 FIOW touse this manual inaa a ole cenuseuesccesmeasccens 3 Before Use Care ofthe camera oon a es a E E 10 Standard ACCESSOTICS raa a a e a E a A any cence A ee eee ees 11 Names and Functions of Components cccceeeeeeeeeeee
219. ictures may be printed several times In this case the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set e Only pictures taken in JPEG format can be printed Those taken in RAW will use the JPEG pictures that were simultaneously created If an equivalent JPEG picture is not available no print will take place 330 O B Others Optional accessories i External Flash optional After attaching the flash DMW FL360L DMW FL220 DMW FL360 DMW FL500 optional the effective range will be increased when compared to the camera s built in flash Preparations e Turn off the camera and close the built in flash Removing the Hot Shoe Cover The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot shoe Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction indicated by arrow while pressing it in the direction indicated by arrow e When the hot shoe is not in use make sure to attach the hot shoe cover e Please be careful not to lose the hot shoe cover e Keep the Hot Shoe Cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing E Using the dedicated flash DMW FL360L optional 1 Attach the dedicated flash to the hot shoe and then turn on the camera and the dedicated flash 2 Select the menu Die Rec Flash 3 Press A V to select Flash Mode and then press MENU SET 4 Press A F to select an item and then press MENU SET e While the external flash is connected the
220. if Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc to be added It was established by JEITA Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association e Rotate Disp may not work on a screen that plays back multiple pictures such as the one displayed after Delete Multi is selected 259 Playback Editing Favorite O You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as favourites La J e Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show e Play back only the pictures set as favourites Favorite Play 5 e Delete all the pictures not set as favourites All Delete Except Favorite YY 1 Selectthe menu Da Playback Favorite Single Multi 2 Select the picture Single setting Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again e Exit the menu after it is set Multi setting Press A V lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET to set repeat e The setting is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed again e Exit the menu after it is set E Cancelling all the Favorite settings Select the menu Say Playback Favorite Cancel e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e In Playback Mode the Cancel is disabled e
221. ift setting the aperture value or adjusting the shutter speed e Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red e When Expo Meter is not displayed switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP P71 e The Expo Meter disappears after approximately 4 seconds if no operation is performed O B Recording Modes Programme Shift In Programme AE Mode you can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed without changing the exposure This is called Programme Shift You can make the background more blurred by decreasing the aperture value or record a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when taking a picture in Programme AE Mode E Example of Programme Shift When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used 1 0123 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 Ev 1 112 14 1ig 145 1 30 1 60 1 425 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 8000 B A Aperture value B Shutter speed Programme Shift amount Programme Shift line chart Programme Shift limit e EV is an abbreviation of Exposure Value The EV changes with the aperture value or the shutter speed e If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway the aperture value and shutter speed turn red and blink e The camera returns to normal Programme AE Mode if more than 10 seconds pass after Programme Shift is activated However the Programme Shift setting i
222. image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording Sending selected images O Send Images Stored in the Camera e Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device e For information on the playback of images check the operating instructions of the destination device e For details on how to send images refer to P307 282 u Wi Fi NFC Preparations When sending a picture to Home set your device to DLNA waiting mode e Read the operating instructions of your device for details When sending images to External the following are required e Registration to LUMIX CLUB P295 e Address number and access number acquired by the destination External AV device P300 Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording P283 Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera P284 e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract Sending an image each time a recording is made Send Images While Recording 1 Select the menu Mi New Connection Send Images While Recording AV device Select Home or External Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 e When External is selected Direct cannot be selected Select a device you want to connect
223. images to web services Use the LUMIX CLUB when uploading pictures to web services or external AV device e You can set the same LUMIX CLUB login ID for this unit and a smartphone tablet P298 O g Refer to the LUMIX CLUB site for details http lumixclub panasonic net eng c Please note e The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected troubles and the service contents may be changed or added without prior notice to the users e The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice I Acquiring a new login ID New account 1 Select the menu 2 Select Set Add Account Terms of use Delete account 3 Select New account e Connect to the network Proceed to the next page by selecting Next e A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the camera Select Yes to acquire a new login ID or No if you do not need to acquire a new login ID 4 Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point and set e Refer to P302 for details A setting screen will be displayed only when connecting for the first time Once you set the connection method it will be saved on this unit and used when connecting the next time To change the wireless access point you want to connect to press DISP and change the connection destination e Proceed to the next page by selecting Next New acco
224. in the following cases When recording motion pictures Just by touching the subject you want as your point of focus the camera will focus on the subject and take the picture automatically 4 Touch k 2 Touch bx e Icon will change to b and taking a picture with the Touch Shutter function becomes possible 3 Touch the subject you wish to focus on and then take a picture The picture is taken when the focus is achieved e If the histogram is displayed on top of the subject you want to touch touch the subject after first moving the histogram by dragging it P16 E To cancel the Touch Shutter function Touch j e If shooting with the touch shutter fails the AF area turns red and disappears In that case try again e Measurement of brightness is performed on the spot touched when the Metering Mode P 168 is set to C At the edge of the screen the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched location Basic 7 Recording Motion Picture This camera can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD a format or motion pictures recorded in MP4 5 B Audio will be recorded in stereo 1 Start recording by pressing the motion picture button a Elapsed recording time Available recording time e Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode is possible e The recording state indicator red will flash while recording motion pictur
225. ing pictures Wait until sending is complete O B Wi Fi NFC Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera 1 Select the menu MA New Connection Send Images Stored in the Camera Web service 2 Select Via Network and connect P301 3 Select a web service you want to connect e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Select Single Select or Multi Select e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 Single Select setting Select the picture Select Set Multi Select setting Select the picture repeat The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected again Select OK The number of pictures that can be sent by Multi Select is limited e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected 292 v Wi Fi NFC 4 When sending images to Cloud Sync Service E Methods for sending and images that can be sent 3D Sending an image each time a recording is made O Send Images While Recording Sending selected images O Send Images Stored in the Camera e Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device e For information on the playback of images check the operating instructions of the destination device e For details on how to send images refer to P307 Preparations You need to register to LUMIX CLUB
226. ing the screen e It can also be displayed by pressing lt 4 to display the setup screen for the enlarged area deciding the area to enlarge using the cursor button and then pressing MENU SET e It will switch to the setting screen for the enlarged area by pressing the cursor button when the Direct Focus Area in the Custom menu is set to ON E Changing the display of the MF Assist Each time the rear dial is pressed an enlarged display switches between a windowed screen display and a full screen display e If the front dial or rear dial is rotated the display can be enlarged reduced up to approximately 3 to 6 times when the enlarged display is in a windowed display or up to approximately 3 to 10 times when the enlarged display is in a full screen display The rear dial enlarges reduces the size at a rate of 1 time and the front dial enlarges reduces it at a rate of 0 1 times e The display can also be enlarged reduced by pinching out pinching in E Moving the enlarged area e The enlarged area can be moved by dragging the screen P16 or pressing the cursor button e The following will return the MF assistance to the original position Pressing DISP when the setting screen for determining the area to be enlarged is displayed E Closing the MF Assist e It will close when the shutter button is pressed halfway e You can also close MF Assist by pressing MENU SET or touching Exit e When displayed by moving the focus lever
227. ing to other equipment Saada e SD pictues er eee E acc esec cere T E E 311 Playing Back Pictures On a TV Screen csceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeessaaeeeeses 315 Usina VIERA Lipk HOMI eee eee ere een eee ene eee er eee ee eereee te ee 318 Saving still pictures and motion pictures on your PC ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 320 About he supplied software mr 5592 os a ee 321 Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a Recorder c cscceseeeeeeees 325 8 Vv Printing the Pictures on erea saree oerees evcaeerecas coreseeceeeeeceeees 326 Others Optional accessories one a a ores sree E oot er veceareee as 331 Monitor Display Viewfinder Display ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeses 334 Message Display rra ae e aa a aea AEE a a Eaa E 341 Menu list aoa E a a tinea 345 SOREN GG e renee A ae ee nea A A T E eae nee eee A 345 AMOO PIC Ure I a a cee eece nate eee ge ne cerns nee ecs mare eer meee dence natn tenes 348 CUS 6 9 eee ae a Mee een eee ae ene eee ae ncn eee rer fae eee eee ae ee 349 Oo SG UWP I setae nae oe eee agers sae cms see ne cera ame gee ee A E an nae nee 352 eT AV DIAG Kee serene perce a a e E eteae een Rebs seer ae onee eee eee 354 Mroubleshoo tinge na aaea a E E E ts 355 S epee Serre eae areca E E E eee een A ee eetee 371 U Before Use Care of the camera Do not subject to strong vibration shock or pressure e The lens monitor or exte
228. is information in the login screen of the LUMIX CLUB website Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit Transfer completed Some files are left because of destination limit e Check the file format of the image to send P277 281 282 285 289 293 e Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large Split the motion picture using Video Divide P254 Unavailable Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site e Login to the LUMIX CLUB from your smartphone tablet or PC and set the login details of the destination web service Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together e Web services designed only for pictures and web services designed only for motion pictures cannot be selected at the same time Deselect one of the services Cannot get IP address Please set wireless AP s IP address setting to DHCP e Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points Cannot connect to server e lf a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate agree to update the root certificate 344 U Others Click the followings to jump to the beginning of each menu o Req P345 Motion Picture P348 Custom P349 Playback P354 This menu lets you set the aspect ratio number of pixels and other aspects of the pictures you are recording e Photo Style Metering Mode Highlight Shadow i Dy
229. is will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture js Guide Line When the Auto Review function is activated or when Highlight playing back white saturated areas appear blinking in P79 black and white You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and Constant Preview shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual P96 Exposure Mode rear dial Expo Meter Set whether or not to display the exposure meter P90 Dial Guide Set whether or not to display the dial operation guide P18 LVF Disp Style This will set the display style of the viewfinder P72 Monitor Disp Style This will set the display style of the monitor P71 Monitor Info Disp Display the recording information screen P73 Rec Area This changes the angle of view during motion picture P231 recording and still picture recording DE This will switch display between the number of a ca recordable pictures and available recording time Cat Auto Review Set the length of time that the picture is displayed after P66 taking the still picture Fn Button Set You can assign frequently used functions to particular P47 buttons or icons Q MENU Switch the setting method of Quick Menu P44 Dial Set Changes the operation methods of the front dial and P19 350 u s CY Enables disables the motion picture button Sets the screen display and lens operations when Video Button Power Zoom Lens Eye Sens
230. ith a picture size larger than the original pictures is selected the resolution of the motion picture will deteriorate e We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor optional and a DC coupler optional e lf power supply is lost by unplugging the AC adaptor or due to a blackout while creating a motion picture with the AC adaptor the motion picture you are creating will not be recorded e A motion picture that exceeds the recording time of 29 minutes and 59 seconds and a motion picture that exceeds the file size of 4 GB cannot be created e A motion picture shorter than 1 second is displayed as Os on the motion picture recording time P77 e If only one picture was taken the picture is not saved as a group picture A picture cannot be selected from Additional when it is the only one that was taken T2 Not available in these cases e Stop Motion Animation is not available in the following cases Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Multi Exp When using Time Lapse Shot vu Disabling Operational Sounds and the Output of Light at once Silent Mode Applicable modes PeP A S M sui C1 C2 c3 sali This function is useful for recording images in a quiet environment public facility etc or recording images of subjects such as babies or animals Select the menu Custom Silent Mode Settings ON OFF e Operational sounds are muted and the flash
231. ity ratio of the flash manually In TTL you can shoot the MANUAL photograph you want even when shooting dark scenes that may otherwise be too brightly lit by the flash e When MANUAL is set the luminosity ratio 1 1 etc is displayed on the flash icon on the screen Setting the luminosity ratio When MANUAL is selected 1 Select Flash in the Rec menu P40 2 Press A F to select Manual Flash Adjust and then press MENU SET 3 Press lt gt to select an item and then press MENU SET e You can set from 1 1 full brightness to 1 128 in steps of 1 3 Setting the wireless flash Applicable modes P A S M By using flashes that support the wireless control DMW FL360L optional you can control firing of the built in flash or a flash attached to the hot shoe of this unit and three flash groups separately Preparations Open the flash by sliding the flash open lever of this unit Alternatively attach a flash DMW FL360L optional to this unit 1 Set the external flashes to be controlled to RC Mode and then place them e Set the channel and groups for the external flashes to be controlled 2 Select the menu CAm Rec Flash 3 Press A V to select Wireless and then press MENU SET 4 Press A V to select ON and then press MENU SET e When Wireless is set to ON WL is displayed on the flash icon on the recording screen e When making detailed settings of the wireless
232. k and white This does not affect the recorded image e If there are any white saturated areas we recommend compensating the exposure towards negative P166 referring to the histogram P73 and then taking the picture again It may result in a better quality picture e This does not work while in Multi Playback Calendar Playback or Playback Zoom pee o Deleting Pictures Once deleted pictures cannot be recovered e Pictures that are not in the DCF standard or those that are protected cannot be deleted S To delete a single picture 1 In Playback Mode select the picture to delete and then press 7 9 The same operation can be performed by touching ta 2 Press A to select Delete Single and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed Picture is deleted by selecting Yes Delete Multi Delete All Bi O Delete Confirmation in the Playback menu enables you to set which option on the delete confirmation screen Yes or No will be highlighted first The default setting is No P264 e A single picture can be deleted directly by pressing the function button to which Delete Single has been set P50 peso CY i To delete multiple pictures up to 100 or all the pictures x Picture groups are treated as a single picture All the pictures in the selected picture group a will be deleted D In Playback Mode press 7 9 2 Press A V to select Delete Mu
233. k the environment of your PC z7 e Operating environment of PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9 2 PE OS 5 Windows XP 32bit SP3 Windows Vista 32bit SP2 Windows 7 32bit 64bit or SP1 Windows 8 32bit 64bit CPU Pentium IlI 500 MHz or higher Windows XP Pentium III 800 MHz or higher Windows Vista Pentium III 1 GHz or higher Windows 7 Windows 8 Display 1024x768 pixels or more 1920x 1080 pixels or more recommended RAM 512 MB or more Windows XP Windows Vista 1 GB or more Windows 7 32bit Windows 8 32bit 2 GB or more Windows 7 64bit Windows 8 64bit Free hard disk space 450 MB or more for installing software e Refer to the operating instructions of PHOTOfunSTUDIO PDF for further operating environment e For details on SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3 1 SE please read the support site given on P321 2 Insert the CD ROM with the supplied software e When you insert the supplied CD ROM the install menu will start 3 Click on the Recommended Installation Proceed with installation according to messages appearing on the screen e The software compatible with your PC will be installed e On the Mac SILKYPIX can be installed manually Insert the CD ROM with the supplied software Double click on the automatically displayed folder Double click the icon in the application folder Not available in these cases e PHOTOfunSTUDIO and LoiLo
234. l to the overall image Items that can be set Kaka Pink d Aquamarine AAA emphasised bhig emphasised Tr y Whe TAN ce M W e If you select this effect with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode the effect may not be apparent in places with insufficient brightness 11 Recording Modes This effect adds a dark and relaxing feel to the overall image and enhances bright parts Items that can be set Gaour Red Blue emphasised emphasised D p Aa This effect creates a sepia image Items that can be set Low contrast High contrast This effect creates a black and white picture Items that can be set Se Conia Yellow Blue S emphasised emphasised Dynamic Monochrome This effect gives a higher contrast to create an impressive black and white picture Items that can be set Low contrast High contrast Recording Modes This effect creates a black and white picture with granular noise Items that can be set Less gritty Grittier e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping Silky Monochrome This effect blurs the overall image to add a soft feel to a black and white picture Items that can be set Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping Impressive Art TER i are This effect giv
235. l work within this range 2 Blue sky 3 Cloudy sky Rain 4 Shade 5 Sunlight 6 White fluorescent light 7 Incandescent light bulb 8 Sunrise and sunset 9 Candlelight K Kelvin Colour Temperature Image and Picture Quality Settings i Setting the White Balance manually Set the White Balance value Use to match the condition when taking photographs 1 Press gt WB 2 Rotate the rear dial or front dial to select 14 or 24 and then press A 3 Aim the camera at a sheet of white paper etc so that the frame in the centre is filled by the white object only and then press MENU SET 2 e White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too dark Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate brightness Setting the colour temperature You can set the colour temperature manually for taking natural pictures in different lighting conditions The colour of light is measured as a number in degrees Kelvin As the colour temperature increases the picture becomes more bluish As the colour temperature decreases the picture becomes more reddish 1 Press WB 2 Rotate the rear or front dial to select K and then press A 3 Press A V to select the colour temperature and then press MENU SET The value can also be set by touching A W e You can set a colour temperature from 2500K to 10000K Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 O i Finely adjusting the W
236. lash setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off When changing scene using Scene Guide Mode the Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the default value with each change of scene e Flash will not be activated when recording motion picture v Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro Applicable modes PI A S M 2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed 1 Select the menu CAm Rec Flash 2 Press A F to select Flash Synchro and then press MENU SET 3 Press A F to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings 1st curtain synchro 1ST The normal method when taking pictures with the flash 2nd curtain synchro The light source appears behind the subject and picture Pei becomes dynamic e Set it to 1ST for normal use e 2nd is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set Flash Synchro to 2ND e Only available when Wireless in Flash is set to OFF P224 e The Flash Synchro settings also apply to an external flash except the wireless flash P331 e When a fast shutter speed is set the effect of Flash Synchro may deteriorate e You cannot set or s when Flash Synchro is set to 2ND 222 O B Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Adjust the flash output Applica
237. le with these formats Also the recording information may not be displayed properly 363 uv poms CY It cannot connect to the wireless LAN Radio waves get disconnected e Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network e Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access point Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point e When the radio waves are interrupted the condition may improve by moving the location or changing the angle of the wireless access point lt may not automatically connect when the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to broadcast Set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast e Is any device such as microwave oven cordless phone etc that uses 2 4 GHz frequency operated nearby Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously Use them sufficiently away from the device e Is the 5 GHz 2 4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the 5 GHz band The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz 2 4 GHz simultaneously is recommended It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible e When the battery indicator is flashing red the connection with other equipment may not start or the connection may be disrupted A message such as Communication error is displayed Wireless access point is not displayed Or
238. leave any metal items such as clips near the contact areas of the power plug Otherwise a fire and or electric shocks may be caused by short circuiting or the resulting heat generated e The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left but it is not recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully charged Since characteristic swelling may occur Preparation 4 Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures E Recording still pictures when using the Monitor By CIPA standard in Programme AE Mode When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used Number of recordable pictures Approx 320 pictures Recording time Approx 160 min When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Number of recordable pictures Approx 350 pictures Recording time Approx 175 min E Recording still pictures when using the Viewfinder By CIPA standard in Programme AE Mode When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used Number of recordable pictures Approx 280 pictures Recording time Approx 140 min When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Number of recordable pictures Approx 300 pictures Recording time Approx 150 min u Preparation Recording conditions by CIPA standard e CIPA is an abbreviation of Camera amp Imaging Products Association e Temperature 23 C 73 4 F Humidity 50 RH when monitor viewfinder is on e When using
239. lice 98 e You can also set with A W lt B and MENU SET Preparation d E When operating the touch screen 1 Press Q MENU to display the Quick Menu 2 Touch the menu item 3 Touch the setting 4 Touch Exit to exit menu once the setting is completed e You can close the menu by pressing the shutter button halfway amp 2 1 7 60 o AUTO awe Exit Fo Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items CAN Custom Q MENU PRESET The default items can be set CUSTOM The Quick Menu will consist of desired items P45 Preparation Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item When Q MENU P44 in the Custom menu is set to CUSTOM the Quick Menu can be changed as desired Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu Press V to select Q and then press MENU SET i Okela i O JO Press A V lt 41 gt to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU SET Press lt P gt to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU SET a Items that can be setup as Quick Menus Items that can be displayed in the Quick Menu screen Rimini Da ee ay 224 oles feo e You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row e If there is no empty space in the bottom row you can replace an existing item with a new select item by sele
240. ll operate automatically when the camera is turned on but you can use this function when you see dust P372 The card is formatted Formatting permanently deletes all data on your memory card Please be sure all pictures and motion pictures are saved elsewhere before using this feature Format e Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor optional when formatting Do not turn the camera off during formatting e lf the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment format it on the camera again e If the card cannot be formatted please try another card before contacting Panasonic Preparation a Entering Text g It is possible to enter babies and pets names and the locations when recording When a screen that looks like the one on the right is displayed you can enter characters Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered gt DEF A EE Pat 3 GHI JKL MNO uw Sa PQRS TUV WXYZ Delete Sumy 1 Press A V lt P to select text and then press MENU SET to register e Move the cursor to 4 and then press MENU SET to switch text between A capitals a lower case 1 numbers and amp Special characters To enter the same characters in a row move the cursor by rotating the rear dial to the right e The following operations can be performed by moving the cursor to the item and pressing MENU SET iu Enter a blank Delete Delete a cha
241. llowing the on screen instructions e This operation is not available for Wi Fi Direct connection When this unit and the smartphone tablet have acquired different login IDs When you want to use the smartphone s tablet s login ID for this unit Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone tablet When you want to use this unit s login ID for the smartphone tablet Change the login ID and password for the smartphone tablet to those acquired by this unit Check the LUMIX CLUB terms of use Check the details if the terms of use have been updated 1 Select the menu CLAM Setup Wi Fi gt Wi Fi Setup _ gt LUMIX CLUB 2 Select Terms of use The camera will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed Close the menu after checking the terms of use 298 Wi Fi NFC O i Delete your login ID and account from the LUMIX CLUB Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it You can also delete your LUMIX CLUB account 1 wR N Select the menu Select Delete account e The message is displayed Select Next Select Yes in the login ID delete confirmation screen e The message is displayed Select Next Select Yes on the confirmation screen for deleting the LUMIX CLUB account e If you want to continue using the service selecting No
242. lowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Clear Night Portrait Scene Guide Mode When you set to a slow shutter speed Using the Optical Image Stabiliser function of a lens Applicable modes mPas Mlencec ka A lens based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard Four Thirds System standard equipped with the Optical Image Stabiliser function is required P203 1 Select the menu CAm Rec Stabilizer Operation Mode 2 Press A F to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Description of settings Eid Vertical and horizontal shake are compensated for Normal LENS Camera shake is corrected for up down movements This mode is ideal wis for panning a method of taking pictures which involves turning the camera to track the movements of a subject which continues to move in a fixed direction Panning Stabilizer does not work OFF This can be selected only when using a lens without the O 1 S switch e Exit the menu after it is set 204 vu Stabiliser Zoom and Flash e The Optical Image Stabiliser may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its operation but these are not malfunctions e When using an optional interchangeable lens with an O I S switch it is possible to set to enable the Optical Image Stabiliser by switching the O 1 S switch on the lens to ON At the time of purchase it is initially set to
243. lti or Delete All and then press MENU SET e Delete All Confirmation screen is displayed Pictures are deleted by selecting Yes e It is possible to delete all pictures except the ones set as favourite when All Delete Except Favorite is selected with the Delete All set 3 When Delete Multi is selected Press A V lt P gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET to set Repeat this step m appears on the selected pictures If MENU SET is pressed again the setting is cancelled 4 When Delete Multi is selected Press lt to select OK and then press MENU SET to execute e Confirmation screen is displayed Pictures are deleted by selecting Yes e Do not turn the camera off while deleting Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor optional e Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted it may take some time to delete them Recording Modes Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function Intelligent Auto Mode Recording Mode When you wish to leave settings to the camera and record without thinking about them use Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto Mode which makes optimal settings for the subject and scene i About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode e Functions that can be set differ between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode O possible not possible Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Aut
244. may deteriorate the communication performance e This function cannot be used in the following cases When connecting to a PC or a printer When recording motion pictures When using Time Lapse Shot 273 Wi Fi NFC Taking pictures via a smartphone tablet remote recording 1 Connect to a smartphone tablet P270 C 2 Select a on the smartphone tablet e The recorded images are saved in the camera e Motion pictures can also be recorded e Some settings are not available e The screen differs depending on the operating system Saving images stored in the camera 1 Connect to a smartphone tablet P270 2 Select P on the smartphone tablet 3 Drag an image to save it e If an image is touched the picture will be played back in an enlarged size The function can be assigned to the top bottom left or right according to your preference 274 2 On the camera e Set NFC Operation to ON P309 e Set Touch Sharing to ON P310 Wi Fi NFC d i Transferring images stored in the camera easily A Wi Fi connection using NFC function is possible by touching the smartphone tablet to this unit and you can easily transfer images displayed on the screen An image can be sent on site immediately after taking it so you can easily send it to the smartphone tablet of your family or friend Installing the Image App is required for use Preparation On your sm
245. me that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection If the SSID matches for both devices transmission is possible E Before Use e To use the Wi Fi function on this unit a wireless access point or a destination device equipped with the wireless LAN function is required 265 a 2 Wi Fi NFC E This unit is compatible with NFC Using the NFC Near Field Communication function you can easily transfer data necessary for a Wi Fi connection between this camera and the smartphone tablet Compatible models This function can be used with the NFC compatible device with Android OS version 2 3 3 or higher excluding some models e For information on the operation and settings of NFC compatible smartphones tablets refer to the operating instructions of your device E About the Wi Fi connection lamp a Wi Fi connection lamp Lit blue The Wi Fi connection is on standby Blinking blue Sending receiving data through the Wi Fi connection E About the Wi Fi button Wi Fi Fn3 button can be used in two ways as Wi Fi or as Fn3 function 3 At the time of purchase it is initially set to Wi Fi e Refer to P47 for details about the function button E What you can do with the Wi Fi button when connected to Wi Fi If Wi Fi button is pressed when connected to Wi Fi the following operations can be performed Item Description of settings Terminate the Connection Terminates the Wi
246. ms used Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device E Use of the Wi Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this camera is sold There is the risk that the camera violates the radiowave regulations if used in countries other than those where this camera is sold and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any violations E There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted by a third party E Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields static electricity or interference e Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields static electricity or interference such as near microwave ovens These may cause the interruption of the radio waves e Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the 2 4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices E Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use When the camera utilises its Wi Fi function wireless networks will be searched automatically When this happens wireless networks that you are not authorised to use SSID may be displayed however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as unauthorised access x SSID refers to the na
247. n pictures can be set to OFF with Continuous AF P230 e lf you use the zoom function buttons or dials during motion picture recording operational sounds may be recorded Use of Silent Operation is recommended if you are concerned about operational sounds P127 e While recording motion pictures plugging the aperture of the microphone with a finger may reduce the level of audio recording or audio may not record at all Also be careful because the operation sound of lenses can easily be recorded at this time 359 O B Lens s CY Recorded image may be warped or nonexistent colour is surrounding the subject e Depending on the lens used picture may be warped slightly or you may see colours along the edge depending on the zoom factor due to the characteristics of the lens Also the peripherals of the image might look warped because the perspective is enhanced when the wide angle is used This is not a malfunction When the lens is attached to another digital camera stabiliser function cannot be turned off or stabiliser function does not work e The Optical Image Stabiliser function of the interchangeable lens H FS1442A only works correctly with supported cameras When older Panasonic digital cameras DMC GF1 DMC GH1 DMC G1 are used Stabilizer in the Rec menu P203 cannot be set to OFF It is recommended to update the firmware of the digital camera at the following website http panasonic jp support
248. n send pictures and motion pictures to an SNS etc via LUMIX CLUB By setting up automatic transfers of pictures and P289 motion pictures to the Cloud Sync Service you can receive the transferred pictures or motion pictures on a PC or smartphone 268 vG Wi Fi NFC A Controlling with a Smartphone Tablet You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone tablet You need to install Panasonic Image App referred to as Image App from this point on on your smartphone tablet Installing the smartphone tablet app Panasonic Image App The Image App is an application provided by Panasonic For Android apps For iOS apps OS Android 2 2 Android 4 2 iOS 5 0 iOS 6 1 Connect your Android device 7 Connect the iOS device to the to a network network Select Google Play Store 2 Select App Stores Enter Panasonic Image App 3 Enter Panasonic Image App into the search box into the search box Select Panasonic Image 4 Select Panasonic Image App and install it App and install it e The icon will be added to the D e The icon will be added to the D N N menu Panasorec menu Panasorsc Installation procedure 4 e Use the latest version e The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone tablet being used For information on the Image App refer to the support site below http panasonic jp support gl
249. n the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record the Direction Detection Function may not work correctly e Motion pictures taken with the camera held vertically are not displayed vertically e You cannot record 3D pictures in vertical orientation O B jee Ci Using the Viewfinder Switching the Monitor Viewfinder E Using the eye sensor to switch between the Monitor and Viewfinder When LVF Monitor Auto of Eye Sensor P63 in the Custom menu is set to ON and your eye or an object is brought close to the viewfinder the display automatically switches to the viewfinder display Eye sensor LVF Fn4 button e Eye sensor might not work properly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses the way you hold the camera or bright light shining around the eyepiece Switch manually in that case e During motion picture playback or a slideshow the camera does not automatically switch the display to the Viewfinder with the eye sensor Fo Setting the eye sensor sensitivity and the automatic switching of the display between the Monitor and Viewfinder CAN Custom Eye Sensor Item Settings Sensitivity This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor HIGH LOW LVF Monitor This will set whether to automatically switch the display from the Monitor to Auto the Viewfinder when your eye or an object is brought closer to the eye sensor ON OFF E Switching the Monitor Vi
250. namic i Resolution and Digital Zoom are common to both the Rec menu and Motion Picture menu Changing these settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu You can select effects to match the type of image you Photo Style wish to record You can adjust the colour and image P130 quality of the effects Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio of the image P139 Picture Size Set the number of pixels P139 Quality Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to P140 be stored Metering Mode Sets the light metering method for measuring P168 brightness Burst Rate Sets the burst speed for burst recording P179 Auto Bracket Sets single burst recording compensation range and P183 recording sequence for Auto Bracket recording Self Timer Sets the manner in which the self timer works P186 You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark Highlight Shadow portions on an image while checking the brightness on P132 the screen i Dynamic Intelligent Adjusts the contrast and exposure P142 dynamic range control i Resolution Records pictures with more defined outlines and sense P142 of clarity HDR You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of P143 exposure into a single picture with rich gradation 345 es CY Ly Multi Exp Gives an effect like multi exposure up to 4 times P169 equivalent per a single image You can set the recording start time the recording WA
251. nasonic TV for easy operations when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using a HDMI mini cable for automatic linked operations Not all operations are possible e VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on a HDMI control function using the standard HDMI CEC Consumer Electronics Control specification Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices e This unit supports VIERA Link Ver 5 function VIERA Link Ver 5 is the standard for Panasonic s VIERA Link compatible equipment This standard is compatible with Panasonic s conventional VIERA Link equipment Preparations Set the VIERA Link to ON P58 1 Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an HDMI mini cable P315 2 Turn the camera on and then press gt 3 Operate with the remote control for the TV e Operate with reference to the operation icons displayed on the screen e To play back the sound of a film during a slideshow set Sound to AUTO or Audio on the Slide Show setting screen e It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or more HDMI input terminals on the TV e Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited OO Zi
252. nation can be set after setting up Home After selecting Destination or Home press lt gt to select an area and press MENU SET to set oy Destination Travel destination area World Time Current time of the destination area Time difference from home area A Home Your home area Current time Time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time e Press A if you are using Daylight Savings a The time will move forward by 1 hour Press A once more to return to the normal time e lf you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen set by the time difference from the home area u Preparation Departure date and return date of the trip as well as the name of the travel destination can be set You can display the number of days that have passed when playing back the pictures and stamp it on the recorded pictures with Text Stamp P251 Travel Setup SET Departure date and return date are set Elapsed days how many days after of the trip are recorded OFF e The travel date is automatically cancelled if the current date is after the return date If the Travel Setup is set to OFF Location will also be set to OFF Travel Date Location SET Travel destination is recorded at the time of recording OFF e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text on P61 e The number of days that have passed
253. nction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places Glittering Illuminations The star filter enhances pinpoints of light O Tips e We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places Clear Night Portrait Recording Modes Fill flash and a longer exposure capture better portraits against the nightscape O Tips Open the flash You can set to s We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e When Clear Night Portrait is selected keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the picture O B e When Silent Mode is set to ON the flash is not activated e The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture This is due to signal processing and is not a malfunction e Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places Soft Image of a Flower The soft focus creates a diffused image O Tips e We recommend using a tripod and the self timer e For close up recording we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if
254. nd take a picture ea Laie AFS onon Dov e Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst wb Mode E Cancelling the Burst Mode Select single picture recording or EA from among the drive modes P178 180 amp 2 Shutter Drive Settings O Focusing in Burst Mode The method for achieving focus varies depending on the focus mode AFS AFF AFC P147 and Manual Focus P158 and the Focus Release Priority P157 setting in the Custom menu Focus Release Focus Mode a Focus Priority FOCUS AFS At the first picture RELEASE Aeon FOCUS Normal focusing RELEASE Predicted focusing MF a Focus set with Manual Focus x1 When the subject is dark or the burst speed is set to SH the focus is fixed on the first picture x2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the subject 3 Burst speed takes priority and focus is estimated within possible range e We recommend using the shutter remote control DMW RSL1 optional when you want to keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode Refer to P333 for information about the shutter remote control e When the burst speed is set to SH or H when the Focus mode is AFS or MF the exposure and White Balance are fixed at the settings used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures as well Depending on the change in the brightness of the subject the
255. ndergone Cropping B Not available in these cases e You cannot use Cropping for the following pictures Motion pictures Pictures taken with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode Pictures stamped with Text Stamp Pictures taken with RAWs s RAW Or RAW 258 Playback Editing Rotate Rotate Disp holding the camera vertically or rotate pictures manually in 90 steps Rotate The picture is rotated manually e The Rotate function is disabled when Rotate Disp is set to OFF This mode allows you to automatically display pictures vertically if they were recorded 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Rotate 2 Press lt gt to select the picture and then press MENU SET e The Rotate function is disabled for Group Pictures 3 Press A V to select the direction to rotate the picture and then press MENU SET P The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90 The picture rotates counter clockwise in steps of 90 Exit the menu after it is set I Rotate Disp The picture is automatically rotated and displayed Select the menu CAm Playback Rotate Disp ON e The pictures are displayed without being rotated when you select OFF e Exit the menu after it is set Not available in these cases e When you play back pictures on a PC they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the OS or software is compatible with Ex
256. ng Cloud Sync Service Select Via Network and connect P301 Check the send setting e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Take pictures e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 You cannot change the settings while sending pictures Wait until sending is complete i Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera 1 Select the menu Mi New Connection gt Send Images Stored in the Camera Cloud Sync Service 2 Select Via Network and connect P301 3 Check the send setting e When the connection is complete the screen is displayed To change the send setting press DISP P308 4 Select Single Select or Multi Select e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 Single Select setting Select the picture Select Set Multi Select setting Select the picture repeat The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected again Select OK The number of pictures that can be sent by Multi Select is limited e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected 294 Wi Fi NFC Registering to the LUMIX CLUB re About the LUMIX CLUB Acquire a LUMIX CLUB login ID free 5 If you register this unit to the LUMIX CLUB you can synchronise images between the devices you are using or transfer these
257. ng a motion picture EXTENDED changes to LOW e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed U Image and Picture Quality Settings 4 Combining pictures with different exposures HDR Applicable modes PI A S M You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich gradation You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when for example the contrast between the background and the subject is large An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG LEAM Rec gt HDR Settings Description of settings ON Records HDR pictures OFF Does not record HDR pictures Dynamic Range AUTO Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the differences between the bright and dark areas 1 EV 2 EV 3 EV Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure parameters SET Auto Align ON Automatically corrects camera shake jitter and other problems that can cause the images to misalign Recommended for use during hand held shooting OFF Image misalignment not adjusted Recommended when a tripod is used E What is HDR HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to a technique for expressing a wide contrast range e Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter
258. ng the Optical Image Stabiliser function e The interchangeable lens H HO20A does not support the Optical Image Stabiliser function Supporting the Optical Image Stabiliser function Not supporting the Optical Image Stabiliser function e Use a Leica lens mount adaptor DMW MA2M DMW MAS3R optional Lenses other than those listed above that can be attached to this unit 203 Optical Image Stabiliser function Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of the lens P204 will be enabled Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit P206 will be enabled Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of the lens P204 will be enabled Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit P206 will be enabled Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit P206 will be enabled Only the Optical Image Stabiliser function of this unit P206 will be enabled VG Stabiliser Zoom and Flash O Preventing jitter camera shake When the jitter alert appears use Stabilizer a tripod the self timer P186 or the shutter remote control DMW RSL1 optional P333 e Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases Keep the camera still from the moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen We recommend using a tripod Slow Sync Slow Sync Red Eye Reduction Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm G
259. o Mode Setting the brightness Defocus Control O Menus that can be set Refer to P85 for details Refer to P85 for details 1 Set the mode dial to EPN e The camera will switch to either the most recently used of Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode At the time of purchase the mode is set to Intelligent Auto Plus Mode 2 Align the screen with the subject e When the camera identifies the optimum scene the icon of the scene concerned is displayed in blue for 2 seconds EY after which its colour changes to the usual red e When the subject is touched AF Tracking function works It is also possible by pressing the cursor button towards lt and then pressing the shutter button halfway For details refer to P150 stp ao l w O B Recording Modes 4 E Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent AUO moge 1 Press MENU SET e Press lt and press A to select gr or HMA 2 Press lt gt to select iia or ef and then press MENU SET e Press DISP or touch 01s i to display the description of the selected mode O It is also possible to display E Sstp C the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in Recording Mode E Scene Detection When taking pictures A gt i i Portrait i Scenery i Macro i Night Portrait i Night Scenery i Food i Baby i Sunset x1 Only when iA AUTO is selected
260. o select Start and then press MENU SET 3 242 u Playback Editing 4 E Operations during a slide show A Play Pause ov jan Exit slide show lt io Back to previous picture om oer Ahead to next picture Rear Reduce volume level Rear Increase volume level dial dial left right e Normal playback resumes after the slide show finishes E Changing the slide show settings You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting Effect or Setup on the slide show menu screen Effect This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one picture to the next AUTO NATURAL SLOW SWING URBAN OFF e When URBAN has been selected the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect e AUTO can be used only when Category Selection has been selected The pictures are played back with the recommended effects in each category Effect is fixed to OFF when in Video Only or during the slide show for E 9 0 IQ in Category Selection e Even if Effect is set it does not work during a slide show of Group Pictures e While viewing pictures in Portrait Mode vertical some selections in the Effect feature are disabled 243 u Playback Editing Setup Duration or Repeat can be set Item Settings Duration 1SEC 2SEC 3SEC 5SEC Repeat ON OFF AUTO Music is played when the still pictures are pla
261. obal cs dsc This Site is English only e When downloading the app on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract Connecting to this unit with Wi Fi Direct requires Android OS 4 0 or higher and Wi Fi Direct support 269 pwiemro CY O Connecting to a smartphone tablet A connection can be easily established by pressing and holding Wi Fi or by using the NFC function Preparations B 1 Press and hold Wi Fi 2 e Install the Image App in advance P269 e The information SSID and password required for directly connecting your smartphone tablet to this unit is displayed Except for when connecting for the first time the screen from the previous connection is displayed e To change the connection method press DISP and then select the connection method ante e The same screen can be displayed by selecting the the smartphone Wi Fi settings following menu items En EEG gt New Connection gt Remote Shooting amp View gt DISP Change method Operate the smartphone tablet Turn on the Wi Fi function Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit and then enter the password Start Image App P269 e When the connection is complete live images being captured by the camera are displayed on the smartphone tablet 270 Sa To change the connection method press
262. ocked Sec AEL aperture value the shutter speed light when the exposure is set Only the focus is locked AF LOCK AFL the focus indication aperture value the shutter speed light when the subject is focused Both focus and exposure are locked AF AE LOCK AFL AEL the focus indication aperture value and the shutter speed light when the subject is focused and the exposure is set AF ON Auto Focus is performed D aS 2 Focus and Exposure Settings Fo Maintaining not maintaining the lock when AF AE LOCK is released CAN Custom AF AE Lock Hold ON OFF e When AE lock is performed the brightness of the recording screen that appears on the screen is fixed e AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode e AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with Manual Focus e Only the AF lock is active during motion picture recording Once you cancel the AF lock during the recording the AF lock cannot be reactivated e The exposure is set even if the brightness of the subject changes e The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is locked e Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked Focus and Exposure Settings Compensating the Exposure Applicable modes 8 P A S u flem c1I c2 c3 fn Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in brightness between
263. ode 3 Press MENU SET to set E Switching the image effect filter selection screen display Press DISP to switch the monitor screen e Each time DISP is pressed or Switch is touched the image effect selection screen is switched e When the image effect selection screen display is set to the guide display description of the selected image effect is displayed a Normal display Guide display List display OO va Recording Modes e To change Creative Control Mode select the dh tab on the menu screen select Filter Switch and then press MENU SET You can return to step 2 e Creative Control settings are memorised even if the camera is turned off e White Balance will be fixed to AWB and Sensitivity will be fixed to AUTO i Adjust the effect to fit your preferences The strength and colours of the effects can be easily adjusted to fit your preferences 1 Press gt to display the setting screen 2 Rotate the rear dial to set e The items that can be set differ depending on which Creative Control Mode is currently set For information on each image effect refer to Items that can be set e Press MENU SET to return to the recording screen e When making the effect setting is displayed on the screen e If you do not change the settings select the centre standard i Taking a picture with a blurred background Defocus Control You can easily set t
264. of view changes at the start of motion picture recording When Rec Area is set to a8 angle of view during motion picture recording is displayed e The recording area indicated is an approximation VTG Motion Picture 4 e The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture e The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly e Depending on the type of the card the card access indication may appear for a while after recording motion pictures This is not a malfunction e When the Extra Tele Conversion is used the angle of view will change when the screen is switched between the still picture screen and motion picture screen because the zoom factor is different between still pictures and motion pictures P211 e lf you end motion picture recording after a short time when using Miniature Effect of the Creative Control Mode the camera may go on recording for a certain period Please continue to hold the camera until the recording finishes e The Sensitivity will be set to AUTO for motion pictures when recording motion pictures Also the ISO Limit Set will not operate e Even if Operation Mode in Stabilizer is set to yl ai will operate in motion picture recording e It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor optional when recording motion pictures P333 e lf while recording motion
265. om pictures registered with Face Recognition Category Play P245 x Names of up to 3 people are displayed Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the order of registration vu e Face Recog only works when the AF Mode is set to 8 e During the Burst Mode Face Recog picture information can be attached to only the first picture e Similarity in facial features can result in one person being recognised as another e Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognise distinctive facial features than regular Face Detection e Even when face recognition information has been registered pictures taken with Name set to OFF will not be categorised by face recognition in Category Play e Even when Face Recognition information is changed P201 Face Recognition information for the pictures already taken will not be changed For instance if the name is changed pictures recorded before the change will not be categorised by face recognition in Category Play e To change the name information of the pictures taken perform the REPLACE in Face Rec Edit P264 B Not available in these cases e You cannot use Face Recog in the following cases Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Artistic Nightscape Glittering Illuminations Appetizing Food Cute Dessert Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode Miniature Effect Creative
266. ommend using a tripod E About 3D viewing Anyone who is hyper sensitive to light suffers from heart disease or is otherwise unwell should avoid viewing 3D contents e Viewing 3D contents may have an adverse effect to the individual If you feel tired uncomfortable or otherwise strange when viewing 3D contents stop viewing at once e Continuing to view may cause illness e After stopping viewing please rest appropriately When viewing 3D contents we recommend taking a break every 30 to 60 minutes e Viewing for extended periods may cause eye fatigue Short sighted or long sighted persons those with differences in the sight of their right and left eyes and those with astigmatism are advised to correct their vision by wearing glasses etc Stop viewing if you can clearly see a double image while viewing 3D contents e There are differences in the way that different people experience 3D contents Please correct your sight appropriately before viewing 3D contents e You can change the 3D setting of your television or 3D output setting of the unit to 2D 375 s CY i Card a YS Do not leave the card where the temperature is high where electromagnetic waves or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight Do not bend or drop the card e The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted 5 e Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
267. on screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed e Motion picture may be lost if the card or battery is removed while processing the dividing e With MP4 motion pictures the order of pictures will change if divided It is recommended to search these motion pictures by using Calendar Playback P239 or Video Only in the Playback Mode Not available in these cases e Avoid trying to divide motion picture near the very beginning or end of the motion picture e You cannot use Video Divide for the following pictures Motion pictures with a short recording time 254 O B Playback Editing Time Lapse Video This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot The created motion picture is saved in MP4 recording format 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Time Lapse Video 2 Select the Time Lapse Shot picture group with lt gt and then press MENU SET 3 Select items and settings Item Description of settings Sets the quality of a motion picture FHD 50p FHD 25p HD 25p VGA 25p Sets the number of frames per second The larger the number is the smoother the motion picture will be 50fps 25fps 12 5fps 8 3fps 6 25fps 5fps 2 5fps 1fps k Only when set to FHD 50p NORMAL Splices pictures together in recording order REVERSE Splices pictures together in reverse
268. on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one e Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject e While the shutter button is pressed halfway shake may be seen on the screen u e Depending on the lens used AFF and AFC may not operate Refer to the website on P21 e When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used AFF and AFC cannot be set e Exit the menu after it is set T2 Not available in these cases e When Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode is set AFF and AFC cannot be set O u Focus and Exposure Settings Type of the Auto Focus Mode About Face Detection The camera automatically detects the person s face The focus and exposure can then be adjusted to fit that face no matter what portion of the picture it is in max 15 areas When the camera detects a person s face the AF area is displayed Yellow When the shutter button is pressed halfway the frame turns green when the camera is focused White Displayed when more than one face is detected Other faces that are the same distance away as faces within the yellow AF areas are also focused e Position and size of the AF area can be changed P153 e When is selected and Metering Mode is set to multiple the camera will adjust the exposure to suit the person s face P168 N
269. or Touch Settings Touch Scroll Menu Guide Shoot w o Lens using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom electrically operated zoom This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor This will set whether to automatically switch the display from the Monitor to the Viewfinder when your eye or an object is brought closer to the eye sensor Enables disables the Touch operation This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding or rewinding pictures using touch operation Set the screen that is displayed when the mode dial is set to amp and Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached to the main body P231 P214 P63 P17 P75 P70 P23 U D Ol oO s CY This menu lets you perform the clock settings select the operating beep tone settings and set other settings which make it easier for you to operate the camera You can also configure the settings of Wi Fi related functions Clock Set Setting Date Time P38 Sets the times for the region where you live and your eon ame holiday destination Departure date and return date of the trip as well as the iavelDate name of the travel destination can be set pae Wi Fi Configure the each setting for Wi Fi functions P309 Set the volume for electronic noises and the electronic Beep shutter noise Speaker Volume Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of 7 levels
270. or discoloured by its heat or lighting e Do not close the flash soon after the flash is activated prior to taking pictures due to Forced ON Red Eye Reduction etc It causes a malfunction e It may take time to charge the Flash if you repeatedly take pictures Take a picture after the access indication disappears e When you attach an external flash it takes priority over the built in flash Refer to P331 for the external flash Not available in these cases e Recording a subject from too close or without sufficient flash will not provide the appropriate level of exposure and may result in a picture that is too white or dark e You must wait a moment to take the next picture while the flash icon is blinking red indicating the flash is charging e If recording a subject without sufficient flash the White Balance may not be properly adjusted e When you use certain lenses light from the flash may be blocked or fail to cover the lens field of view causing dark areas to appear in the resulting pictures e The Red Eye Reduction effect differs between people Also if the subject was far away from the camera or was not looking at the first flash the effect may not be evident O B Stabiliser Zoom and Flash Changing Flash Mode Applicable modes P A S M Set the built in flash to match the recording e Open the flash 1 Select the menu Die Rec Flash 2 Press A F to select Flash Mode and then press M
271. or rotating the focus ring it is closed approximately 10 seconds after operations are stopped Focus and Exposure Settings O e MF Assist or MF guide may not display depending on the lens used but you can display MF SS Assist by direct operation of the camera using the touch screen or a button Not available in these cases e The MF Assist is disabled when using the Digital Zoom or recording motion pictures Ss aS O Technique for Manual Focus Focus by moving the focus lever or rotating the focus ring ew O Move the focus lever or rotate the focus TS SN N ring a little further in the same direction y oN Fine tune the focus by moving the focus o g lever slightly in the opposite direction or rotating the focus ring slightly in the opposite direction e lf you zoom in out after focusing on a subject the focus may lose its accuracy In that case re adjust the focus e After cancelling Sleep Mode focus on the subject again e If you are taking close up pictures We recommend using a tripod and the self timer P186 The effective focus range depth of field is significantly narrowed Therefore if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject it may become difficult to focus on it again The resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly This is nota malfunction 2 Focus and Exposure Settings i Ab
272. ord motion pictures continuously with MP4 is 29 minutes 59 seconds or up to 4 GB For FHD 50p FHD 25p in MP4 format the file size is large and so the recordable time will drop below 29 minutes 59 seconds e The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen Fo Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures and the available recording time CAm Custom gt Remaining Disp o Remaining Shots This will display the number of recordable pictures for still pictures lt lt 8 0 Remaining Time i s This will display the available recording time for motion Deo pictures A Number of recordable pictures Available recording time uv Preparation 4 Setting Date Time Clock Set e The clock is not set when the camera is shipped 1 Turn the camera on e The status indicator lights when you turn this unit on e If the language select screen is not displayed proceed to step 4 Press MENU SET Press A F to select the language and press MENU SET Press MENU SET a A Ww N Press lt P gt to select the items year month day hour minute and press A F to set a Time at the home area 8 Time at the travel destination 1 DEC 2013 e You can cancel without setting the clock by pressing 079 To set the display order and the time display format To display the setting screen of the order time select Styl
273. ores the location of the last used menu item for each menu ON OFF Menu Background Set the background colour for the menu screen e Refer to P42 for details Menu Resume Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen ON OFF Menu Information u Propeaten CY Language Set the language displayed on the screen e f you set a different language by mistake select R8 from the menu icons to set the desired language Version Disp e This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked e is displayed as the lens firmware when the lens is not mounted e Press MENU SET on the version display screen to display information about the software on the unit An exposure value can be reset when the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off ON OFF Exposure Comp Reset Set whether to cancel the self timer when the unit is turned off ON OFF No Reset Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001 e The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001 e A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999 We recommend formatting the card P60 after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere e To reset the folder number to 100 format the card first and then use this function to reset the file number A reset screen for t
274. ormat is set to MP4 Item Description of settings Sets the quality of a motion picture Rec Quality FHD 50p FHD 25p HD 25p VGA 25p Sets the number of frames per second The larger the number is the smoother the motion picture will be 50fps 25fps 12 5fps 8 3fps 6 25fps 5fps 2 5fps 1 fps x Only when set to FHD 50p NORMAL Splices pictures together in recording order REVERSE Splices pictures together in reverse recording order Frame Rate Sequence Press A V to select OK and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected e Motion pictures can also be created from Stop Motion Video in the Playback menu P256 Rec Quality Fie Frame Rate 125fps Sequence NORMAL 3 vu E Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group Selecting Additional in step 4 will display group pictures recorded with Stop Motion Animation Select a set of group pictures press MENU SET and then select Yes on the confirmation screen e Automatic recording may not take place at set intervals because recording takes time under certain recording conditions such as when the flash is used for recording e When a picture quality different from the aspect ratio of the original pictures is selected black strips will be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the motion picture e When a picture quality w
275. ot available in these cases e Under certain picture taking conditions including the following cases the Face Detection Function may fail to work making it impossible to detect faces The AF Mode is switched to 65 When the face is not facing the camera When the face is at an angle When the face is extremely bright or dark When the facial features are hidden behind sunglasses etc When the face appears small on the screen When there is little contrast on the faces When there is rapid movement When the subject is other than a human being When the camera is shaking 2 Focus and Exposure Settings Setting up s AF Tracking Focus and exposure can be adjusted to a specified subject Focus and exposure will keep on following the subject even if it moves Dynamic tracking E When operating buttons Place the subject in the AF tracking frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock the subject a AF tracking frame e AF area will turn green when the camera detects the subject e The AF area turns yellow when the shutter button is released e Lock is cancelled when MENU SET is pressed e Tracking AF and Face Detection will switch every time lt is pressed in the Intelligent Auto f or gy Mode E When operating the touch screen You can lock the subject by touching it e Perform the operation after cancelling the touch shutter function e The AF area turns
276. ourites P305 O Checking the connection detail of a record or favourite If DISP is pressed when selecting an item in the history or favourites the detail of the connection can be displayed e Performing Reset Wi Fi Settings clears the history and the contents saved in Select a destination from Favorite e When connecting to a network to which many PCs are connected by using Select a destination from History or Select a destination from Favorite a connection attempt may fail because the previously connected device will be identified from among many devices If a connection attempt fails reconnect by using New Connection 306 O B pwiemro CY About settings for sending images When sending images select the method for sending them after selecting New Connection After the connection has been completed settings for sending such as the image size for sending can also be changed e When sending images on a mobile network high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract j Send Images While Recording A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it e Since the camera gives priority to recording sending may take longer during the recording e When connected with Send Images While Recording is displayed on the recording screen and f is displayed while sending a file e lf you turn off this unit or the Wi Fi
277. out the focus distance reference mark The focus distance reference mark is a mark used to measure the focus distance Use this when taking pictures with Manual Focus or taking close up pictures Focus range a Focus distance reference mark Focus distance reference line 0 2 m 0 66 feet When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used 0 2 m 0 66 feet Wide to focal length 20 mm When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used 0 3 m 0 98 feet focal length 21 mm to Tele When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Focus and Exposure Settings Fixing the Focus and the Exposure AF AE Lock Applicable modes P A S M isui c1 c2 c3 s 4 This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure u 1 Align the screen with the subject 2 Press and hold AF AE LOCK to fix the focus or exposure e If you release AF AE LOCK AF AE Lock is cancelled e Only the exposure is locked in the default setting 3 While pressing AF AE LOCK move the camera as you compose the picture and then 1760 20 2oi press shutter button fully A a AE Lock indication e When AE LOCK is set after pressing the shutter button halfway to focus press the shutter button fully FO Setting the functions of AF AE LOCK UAN Custom AF AE Lock Item Description of settings Only the exposure is l
278. pictures e Depending on the type of the card recording may stop in the middle If motion picture recording stops during use of a card of at least Class 4 or if you use a card on which recording and deleting have been repeated many times or a card that has been formatted on a PC or other equipment the data writing speed is lower In such cases we recommend that you make a backup of the data and then format P60 the card in this unit When recording a motion picture the screen may go dark e When recording a motion picture the screen may go dark after a certain period to reduce battery consumption but this will not affect the recorded motion picture The screen may be blacked out momentarily or the unit may record noise e The screen may be blacked out momentarily or the unit may record noise due to static electricity or electromagnetic waves etc depending on the environment of the motion picture recording Object seems to be warped e Object seems to be warped slightly when the object moves across the image very fast but this is because the unit is using MOS for the image sensor This is not a malfunction In motion pictures abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded The recorded sound is very quiet e With recording in a quiet environment depending on the lenses used the sound of aperture and focus actions may be recorded in motion pictures This is not a malfunction Focus operation while recording motio
279. r Retouch Press lt gt to select a picture and then press MENU SET Drag your finger over the part you want to delete e The parts to be erased are coloured e Touching Undo will return the coloured part back to its previous State O Erasing details enlarging the display Touch SCALING e The screen is enlarged e Pinching out pinching in P16 the screen allows you to enlarge reduce it e Enlarge reduce can also be performed by rotating the rear dial The enlarged part can be moved by dragging the screen or pressing the cursor buttons Touch REMOVE e Operation returns to that of selecting the parts you want to delete The parts you want to delete can be selected while the enlargement is maintained Touch Set e Preview screen is displayed Touch Save or press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed 248 u Playback Editing d e Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created e For group pictures perform Clear Retouch on each picture They cannot be edited at once e When Clear Retouch is performed on group pictures they are saved as new pictures separate from the original ones Not available in these cases e Not available when the viewfinder is in use Clear Retouch cannot be performed on the following images Motion pictures
280. r forwarding or rewinding pictures continuously Ma Custom Touch Scroll H High speed L Low speed E To finish playback Press gt again press the motion picture button or press the shutter button halfway Not available in these cases e This camera complies with the DCF standard Design rule for Camera File system established by JEITA Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association and with Exif Exchangeable Image File Format This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard peso CY O i Using the Playback Zoom B Rotate the rear dial right 1X 2X 4X 8X gt 16x e When you change the magnification the zoom position indication appears for about 1 second e The more a picture is enlarged the more its quality deteriorates e You can move the enlarged part by pressing A W lt P of the cursor button or dragging the screen P16 e You can also enlarge 2x the image by double touching the part you want to enlarge If you double touch the enlarged image the magnification is reset to 1x e You can also enlarge reduce the image by pinching out pinching in P16 on the part you want to enlarge reduce E Switching the displayed image while maintaining the Playback Zoom You can switch the displayed image while maintaining the same zoom magnification and zoom position for the Playback Zoom Forward or rewind images by rot
281. racter lt 4 Move the entry position cursor to the left gt Move the entry position cursor to the right e A maximum of 30 characters can be entered Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in Face Recog A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for N J e and Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in Face Recog 2 Press A V lt to move the cursor to Set and then press MENU SET to end text input e Text can be scrolled if all of the entered text does not fit on the screen U Tips for taking good pictures Hold the camera gently with both hands keep your arms still at your side and stand with your feet slightly apart e Do not cover the flash the AF Assist lamp the microphone P13 or the speaker with your fingers or other objects e Be careful not to move the camera when you press the shutter button e When taking pictures make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person an object etc This function detects the vertical orientation when you record with the camera vertically orientated When you play back the recording the recording is automatically displayed in vertical orientation Only available when Rotate Disp P259 is set to ON e When recording with this unit Direction Detection can be performed even if you are using a lens that is not compatible with the Direction Detection Function e Whe
282. re 1 Press A to pause motion picture playback 2 Press MENU SET e The same operation can be performed by touching JEJ e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected 6 Geo Boo Bs Go e It will be saved with Picture Size set to S 2 M Aspect Ratio set to 16 9 and Quality set to afm e Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality ENI is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures T2 Not available in these cases e While recording MP4 using VGA 25p the ability to create still pictures is disabled 246 amp 2 Playback Editing Location Logging The location information longitude latitude acquired by the smartphone tablet can be sent to the camera and written in images Preparation Sending location information to the camera from the smartphone tablet e You need to install Panasonic Image App on your smartphone tablet P269 e Read the Help in the Image App menu for further details on how to operate 1 Select the menu Ua Playback Location Logging Add Location Data 2 Press A F to select the period you intend to record location information on images then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected The location information is recorded onto images e Images with location information are in
283. re difficult to achieve in the following cases In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer s day When the shutter speed is faster than 1 100th of a second When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly The background will not become a blur When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily 208 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d Minimising vibration of the shutter Applicable modes P A S M To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration shutter is released after the specified time has passed Select the menu Rec Shutter Delay Settings BSEC 4SEC 2SEC 1SEC OFF uv T2 Not available in these cases e Shutter Delay is not available in the following cases Panorama Shot Scene Guide Mode When HDR is set to ON 209 u Stabiliser Zoom and Flash 4 Taking Pictures with the Zoom Applicable modes f P A S M au c1 c2 ca sal You can zoom out to record landscapes etc in wide angle Wide or zoom in to make people and objects appear closer Tele Zoom lever of an Cursor buttons of this interchangeable lens When using the interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom electrically operated zoom Zoom ring of an interchangeable lens When using the interchangeable lens H FS1442A that does not support the power zoom Cursor buttons of this unit 4
284. rea Recording Modes Soft Focus This effect blurs the overall image to produce a soft feel Items that can be set a g Extent of defocus Weak defocus a Strong defocus e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping Fantasy This effect creates a fantastical image in a pale colour tone Items that can be set E Understated 4 Pop a colours colours iiin Star Filter This effect transforms pin points of light into a star effect Items that can be set Length of shine Short P Long e Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping Recording Modes This effect leaves one selected colour to emphasise impressiveness Items that can be set Small amount of Large amount of Amount of colour left lt gt colour colour E Set the colour to leave in Set the colour to leave in by selecting a location on the screen 1 Press Fn2 to display the setting screen e Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of A then 2 Select the colour you want to leave by moving the frame with A V lt gt e You can also select the colour you want to leave by touching the screen e Press DISP or touch Reset to reset the frame position 3 Press MENU SET to set e You can also set by touching Set e Depending on th
285. recording can be started stopped with the shutter remote control e Read the operating instructions of the shutter remote control for details Not available in these cases e You cannot use the shutter remote control for the following operation Sleep Mode cancellation i AC adaptor optional DC coupler optional By connecting the AC adaptor optional and then plugging them into an electrical socket you can connect this unit to a PC or printer and use without worrying about the capacity of the battery To use the AC adaptor a DC coupler optional is required e Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor optional e When using an AC adaptor use the AC cable supplied with the AC adaptor e Also read the operating instructions for the AC adaptor and DC coupler j Filters optional The MC protector is a transparent filter which affects neither the colours nor the amount of light so it can always be used to protect the camera s lens The ND filter reduces the amount of light to approximately 1 8th equal to adjusting the aperture value 3 increments without affecting the colour balance PL filter will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non spherical surfaces flat non metallic surfaces water vapour or invisible particles in the air making it possible to take a picture with enhanced contrast e Do not attach multiple filters at the same time e You can attach the lens cap or the lens hood when the filter is at
286. recording method for still pictures during P233 motion picture recording Continuous AF Continues to focus on the subject for which focus has P230 been achieved Rec Highlight White saturated areas appear blinking in black and P236 white Ex Tele Conv Increases the Tele effect P211 Fikr Decrease The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or P236 striping in the motion picture Silent Operation Enables touch operations to allow silent use while P4127 recording motion pictures Mic Level Disp Set whether or not the mic levels are displayed on the P237 recording screen Mic Level Adj Adjust the sound input level to 4 different levels P237 Wind Cut This prevents the recording of wind noise P237 automatically 348 2 fomes CY Custom Operation of the unit such as displaying of the screen and button operations can be set up according to your preferences Also it is possible to register the modified settings Cust Set Mem Silent Mode AF AE Lock AF AE Lock Hold Shutter AF Half Press Release AFS AFF AFC Quick AF Eye Sensor AF Pinpoint AF Time AF Assist Lamp Direct Focus Area Focus Release Priority AF MF MF Assist Registers the current camera settings as custom set P128 Disables operational sounds and output of light at once P195 Sets the fixed content for focusing and exposure when the AF AE lock is on This will
287. recording order Rec Quality Frame Rate Sequence 4 Select OK with A V and then press MENU SET e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Exit the menu after it is executed Rec Quality hirven Frame Rate 25fps Sequence NORMAL 3 e lf you select an image quality in which the aspect ratio is different from the one for the picture group black strips will appear on the top and bottom or left and right of the image e f a recorded image quality with a resolution higher than the group pictures has been selected the image will become blurry e When creating motion pictures we recommend you use the sufficiently charged battery or the AC adaptor optional e f power supply is lost by unplugging the AC adaptor or due to a blackout while creating a motion picture with the AC adaptor the motion picture you are creating will not be recorded e A motion picture that exceeds the recording time of 29 minutes and 59 seconds and a motion picture that exceeds the file size of 4 GB cannot be created e A motion picture shorter than 1 second is displayed as Os on the motion picture recording time P77 e If only one picture was taken with Time Lapse Shot the picture cannot be selected 299 Playback Editing Stop Motion Video A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation a Created motion pictures are saved in MP4 recording format
288. reen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected 279 O B Wi Fi NFC a Displaying pictures on a TV You can display pictures on a TV that supports the Digital Media Renderer DMR function of the DLNA standard Preparations Set the TV to DLNA waiting mode e Read the operating instructions for your TV e For details on compatible devices refer to the support sites below http panasonic jp support global cs dsc This Site is English only 1 Select the menu UA New Connection Playback on TV 2 Select Via Network or Direct and connect P301 3 Select a device you want to connect e When the connection is established the screen is displayed 4 Take or play back pictures on this unit e To change the setting or disconnect press Wi Fi P266 e When a TV is connected to this unit the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the connection Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures e Effect and Sound of the Slide Show are disabled T2 Not available in these cases e Motion pictures cannot be played back e During the multi calendar playback pictures displayed on the screen of this unit are not displayed on TV 280 vu Wi Fi NFC a When sending images to Printer You can send images to a compatible printer and print them wirelessly Sending selected images Send Images Stored in the Camera
289. res e Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off e Output from the HDMI mini cable has priority when both AV cable optional and HDMI mini cable are connected e The connection with the USB connection cable supplied will take priority when you connect the USB connection cable supplied simultaneously with the HDMI mini cable e When you play back a picture vertically it may be blurry e Proper playback will be dependent on the TV used for viewing e You can view pictures on TVs in other countries regions which use the NTSC or PAL system when you set Video Out in the Setup menu e No sound is output from the camera speakers e Read the operating instructions for the TV S9 i O vu Connecting to other equipment O The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot e Depending on the TV model pictures may not be displayed on the full screen e The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV model e ln some cases panorama pictures cannot be played back Also auto scroll playback of panorama pictures may not work e For cards compatible with playback refer to the operating instructions of the TV w N Comecingtootercaupment O o Using VIERA Link HDMI What is the VIERA Link HDMI HDAVI Control E e This function allows you to use your remote control for the Pa
290. ressing Y7 Operations that are the same as MENU SET button such as determine settings etc are performed during the various settings e These operating instructions describe operations of the rear dial front dial as follows e g When rotating the rear dial to the left or right e g When rotating the front pressing the rear dial dial to the left or right Allows you to set the aperture shutter speed and other settings whenin P A S M modes Mode dia IY Front dial P P89 Programme Shift A P92 Aperture value S P93 Shutter speed M P94 Aperture value x Pressing the rear dial enables you to set the exposure compensation Fo Displaying not displaying the operation guide Way Custom Dial Guide ON OFF e When ON is set the operation guide for dials buttons etc is displayed on the recording screen nay B Before Use Fo Setting the operation methods of the rear dial and front dial CA Custom Dial Set Item Description of settings Assign Dial F SS Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode iii F mae SS Assigns the aperture value to the front dial and the shutter speed to the rear dial ti SS wer F Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial and the aperture value to the rear dial Rotation F SS Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed NY ait
291. returns to the original setting and the brightness optimisation position is cancelled Not available in these cases e Touch AE is not available in the following cases When using the Digital Zoom When Touch AF in Touch Settings of the Custom menu has been set to AF AE P172 Focus and Exposure Settings Optimising the focus and brightness for a touched position 1 Select the menu Wa Custom Touch Settings Select Touch AF and then touch AF AE a 5 2 3 Touch the subject you want to optimise the brightness for AF area setting screen is displayed P153 The brightness optimisation position is displayed on the centre of the AF area The position follows the movement of the AF area e Metering Mode is set to gg which is used exclusively for the Touch AE e Touching Reset returns the brightness optimisation position and the AF area to the centre Touch Set e The AF area with the same function as is displayed on the touched position e Touching EN returns Metering Mode to the original setting and cancels the brightness optimisation position The AF area setting is also cancelled e Touching EM returns Metering Mode to the original setting and cancels the brightness optimisation position When the background has become too bright etc the brightness contrast with the background can be adjusted by compensating the exposure Focus and
292. ring Mode is set to TTL Manual Flash Adjust Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when Firing Mode is set to MANUAL e You can set from 1 1 full brightness to 1 128 in steps of 1 3 Firing Mode TTL The camera automatically sets the output of the external flash AUTO Flash output is set by the external flash MANUAL Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash manually OFF The external flashes in the specified group will not fire Flash Adjust Set the output of the external flash manually when Firing Mode is set to TTL Manual Flash Adjust Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when Firing Mode is set to MANUAL e You can set from 1 1 full brightness to 1 128 in steps of 1 3 x1 Not available when Wireless FP is set to ON x2 When the flash DMW FL360L optional is attached External Flash is displayed instead of Built in Flash 226 2 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash E Controllable range of the wireless flash Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing toward the camera Estimated controllable range is shown in the following figure Controllable range differs depending on the surrounding environment Placement example 3M 9 8 feet y m 6 6 feet e In this placement example flash C is placed to erase the shadow of the subject that flashes A and B will create e The recommended number of wireles
293. rnal case may be damaged if used in the following conditions It may also malfunction or image may not be recorded if you Drop or hit the camera Press hard on the lens or the monitor This camera is not dust drip water proof Avoid using the camera in places with a lot of dust water sand etc e Liquid sand and other foreign material may get into the space around the lens buttons etc Be particularly careful since it may not just cause malfunctions but it may also become irreparable Places with a lot of sand or dust Places where water can come into contact with this unit such as when using it on a rainy day or at the beach Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera body Since the sensor unit is a precision apparatus it may cause a malfunction or damage E About Condensation When the lens the viewfinder or monitor is fogged up e Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes Be careful of condensation since it causes lens viewfinder and monitor stains fungus and camera malfunction e If condensation occurs turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours The fog will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient temperature U Before Use 4 Standard Accessories Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera e The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the coun
294. ropping Crops the recorded image P258 Rotate Rotate pictures manually in 90 steps P259 This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if Rotate DISP they were recorded holding the camera vertically j Favorite Marks can be added to images and images can be set P260 as favourites Print Set Sets the images for printing and the number of prints P261 Protect Protects images to prevent deletion by mistake P263 Face Rec Edit areas or changes information relating to personal P264 This sets which option Yes or No will be highlighted Delete Confirmation first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture P264 is displayed 354 oes S Troubleshooting First try out the following procedures P355 370 If the problem is not resolved it may be improved by selecting Reset P59 on the Setup menu Battery and power source The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on U e The battery is exhausted Charge the battery e lf you leave the camera on the battery will be exhausted Turn the camera off frequently by using the Economy etc P55 This unit is turned off automatically e lf you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link with a HDMI mini cable and turn the TV off with the remote control for the TV this unit is also turned off If you are not using VIERA Link set VIERA Link to OFF P
295. s flashes for each group is three or less e If the subject is too close signal flashing may affect the exposure This can be reduced by lowering the output with a diffuser etc Correcting red eyes Applicable modes P A S M When Red Eye Reduction S is selected Red Eye Removal is performed whenever the flash is used The camera automatically detects red eye and corrects the picture LANJ Rec gt Red Eye Removal Settings ON OFF JS is displayed on the icon when it is set to ON T2 Not available in these cases e Under certain circumstances red eye cannot be corrected 221 Motion Picture U Recording Motion Picture This camera can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD format or motion pictures recorded in MP4 Audio will be recorded in stereo The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are using and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded Refer to P21 for details Setting the format size and frame rate Applicable modes af e8 P Asmens Bl 1 2 A OC Select the menu DE Motion Picture Rec Format Press A F to select the item and then press MENU SET Item Format This data format is suitable for when playing back on a high definition TV etc MP4 This data format is suitable for when playing back on a PC etc AVCHD Press A F to select
296. s memorised Not available in these cases e Programme Shift will only allow adjustments to be made when there is an adequate amount of light e Programme Shift is available in all Sensitivity settings except fiso Recording Modes Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture Shutter Speed Recording Mode A S M Aperture Priority AE Mode Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background Set the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background 1 Set the mode dial to A 2 Set the aperture value by rotating the rear dial or the front dial Aperture value 6 30 15 8 4 Exposure meter 40 56 80 1 16 i Aperture value Aperture value Reduces Increases It becomes easier to It becomes easier to defocus the maintain focus as far background as the background e It will switch between aperture setting operation and Exposure Compensation operation every time the rear dial is pressed e The effects of the set aperture value will not be visible on the recording screen To check on the recording screen please use Preview P97 e The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ Check the pictures on the playback screen e Rotate the front rear dial to display the Expo Meter Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red e If the exposure is not adequate the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink w
297. s mode to take pictures with previously registered settings Scene Guide Mode P99 This mode allows you to take pictures that match the scene being recorded gt Creative Control Mode P113 Record while checking the image effect Fo Displaying not displaying the selection screen when the mode dial is switched to 5x CEAN Custom gt Menu Guide ON Displays the selection screen for the Scene Guide or the Creative Control Mode OFF Displays the recording screen of the currently selected mode of the Scene Guide or the Creative Control Mode O B Switching the Information Displayed on the recording screen Press DISP to change e You can select between monitor style and LJ viewfinder style for each of the monitor and the viewfinder display screen using Monitor Disp Style and LVF Disp Style in the Custom menu E monitor style e Screen will switch as follows Example of monitor display id 2s0 Bae sks ars HE ars a as wiril rnt sro fana ise oL 987 With information Without information With information tilt sensor display Without information tilt sensor display On monitor recording information Turned off x1 Histograms are displayed when the Histogram of the Custom menu is set to ON It is also possible to display the Exposure meter by setting the Expo Meter of the Custom
298. s recorded by this unit on a PC use the PHOTOfunSTUDIO software on the CD ROM supplied e Motion pictures recorded with Miniature Effect in Creative Control Mode play back at approximately 8 times speed e Screen will switch as follows mr R o awe O G so 200 AFS 3 M BODY i id LR P st F1 7 60 10 00 1 DEC 2013 adaki 0 180200 E F17 60 cto 2057 ane E lt 100 0001 1 98 100 0001 RGB ist With information Detailed information display Histogram display Without information Highlight display 4 Without information x1 If approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed part of the display will disappear Press DISP or touch the monitor to make the display reappear x2 Not displayed while using the playback zoom or during motion picture playback sequential playback panorama playback or a slide show 3 This is displayed if Highlight P79 in the Custom menu is set to ON 4 If no operation is performed for a number of seconds a and other touch icons will disappear e Histogram is displayed in R red G green B blue and Y luminance during the playback Fo Displaying not displaying white saturated areas CAW Custom Highlight ON OFF When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back white saturated areas appear blinking in blac
299. s the ISO sensitivity high or the shutter speed slow Sensitivity is set to AUTO when the camera is shipped Therefore when taking pictures indoors etc noise will appear gt Decrease the ISO sensitivity P174 Increase the setting for Noise Reduction in Photo Style or lower the setting for each of the items other than Noise Reduction P130 Take pictures in bright places Set the Long Shtr NR to ON P144 e Is the Picture Size P139 or the Quality P140 set low e Is the Digital Zoom set P215 Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting fixture e This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera s pickup sensors This is not a malfunction e When you see noticeable flicker or striping while recording a motion picture you can reduce the flicker or striping by setting up Flkr Decrease P236 and fixing the shutter speed It is possible to select a shutter speed from 1 50 1 60 1 100 or 1 120 You can set the shutter speed manually in the Creative Video Mode P125 357 O 2 es CY The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual scene When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc increasing the shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness and colour These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a malfun
300. s used Recordable time Approx 130 min Actual recordable time Approx 65 min When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used Recordable time Approx 140 min Actual recordable time Approx 70 min e These times are for an ambient temperature of 23 C 73 4 F and a humidity of 50 RH Please be aware that these times are approximate e Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as turning this unit on and off starting stopping recording etc e Maximum time to record motion pictures continuously with AVCHD is 29 minutes 59 seconds e Maximum time to record motion pictures continuously with MP4 is 29 minutes 59 seconds or up to 4 GB For FHD 50p FHD 25p in MP4 format the file size is large and so the recordable time will drop below 29 minutes 59 seconds Preparation E Playback when using the monitor Y When the interchangeable lens H H020A is used E Playback time Approx 230 min lt When the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is used YN Playback time Approx 240 min e The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the environment and the operating conditions For example in the following cases the operating times shorten and the number of recordable pictures is reduced In low temperature environments such as on ski slopes Using the AUTO or MODE 1 of Monitor Luminance When Live View Mode is
301. set Step Zoom to ON the zoom speed will not change Photo H High speed M Middle speed L Low speed Video H High speed M Middle speed L Low speed This may only be selected when a power zoom compatible lens with a zoom lever and zoom ring is attached When set to OFF the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation ON OFF amp 2 Stabiliser Zoom and Flash i Digital Zoom Applicable modes P A S M su c1 c2 c3 Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further you can zoom in up to four times the original Zoom magnification Wa Rec Digital Zoom 4x 2x CA Motion Picture Digital Zoom 4x 2x e When using the Digital Zoom we recommend using a tripod and the self timer P186 for taking pictures e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed T2 Not available in these cases e Digital Zoom cannot be used in the following cases Toy Effect Toy Pop Miniature Effect Creative Control Mode Multi Exp Stabiliser Zoom and Flash d Zooming using touch operations You can perform zoom operations by touching Touch zoom Optical Zoom and Extra Tele Conversion for still picture recoding are operable 1 Touch k 2 Touch it
302. since the departure date can be printed out using the PHOTOfunSTUDIO bundled software on the CD ROM supplied e The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set If you set World Time to the travel destination the travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the travel destination setting e The travel date setting is memorised even if the camera is turned off e The Travel Date feature is disabled when recording AVCHD motion pictures e While recording motion pictures the Location feature is disabled Wi Fi Wi Fi Function Wi Fi Setup e Refer to P268 309 for details u Preparation 4 Set the volume for electronic noises and the electronic shutter noise Beep Volume E Shutter Vol Q High X High Q Low 2 Low X OFF 2X OFF The E Shutter Vol only works when SH for Burst Mode or Electronic Shutter is set to ON Speaker Volume Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of the 7 levels e When you connect the camera to a TV the volume of the TV speakers does not change Beep Brightness colour or red or blue tint of the Monitor viewfinder is adjusted O Brightness Adjust the brightness Contrast Saturation Adjust the contrast or clarity of colours Monitor Display Red Tint Nee Adjust the red tint 2 Blue Tint Adjust the blu
303. stered focal lengthand then press MENU SET 207 vue Stabiliser Zoom and Flash e The Optical Image Stabiliser may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its operation but these are not malfunctions e When a tripod is used we recommended that Operation Mode be set to OFF e We recommend taking pictures with the viewfinder when panning in iy 1 e The Optical Image Stabiliser operates only while a picture is being recorded e The longer the focal length is the weaker the effect of the Optical Image Stabiliser will be Not available in these cases e When Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode is set nin of the Optical Image Stabiliser cannot be used e Optical Image Stabiliser is not available in the following cases When the shutter speed is set to B Bulb When the shutter speed exceeds 2 seconds When Burst Rate is set to SH When recording motion pictures Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture only when set to gg motion picture priorities e The stabiliser function may not be effective in the following cases Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button When there is a lot of jitter When the zoom magnification is high When using the Digital Zoom When taking pictures while following a moving subject When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places e The panning effect in Ly is mo
304. tached e If you have difficulty attaching or removing the PL filter on the interchangeable lens H H020A we recommend that you attach or remove the filter with the camera power turned on and the Focus Mode set to MF e Refer to the instructions for each filter for details 333 pores S Monitor Display Viewfinder Display e The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to monitor style in the monitor E In recording Card P34 displayed mea 4 only during recording ek Elapsed recording time 8m30s P231 Simultaneous recording indicator P233 olan 0206 mB 9 IREAIH IREAKJL Peaking P160 Wa Highlight Shadow P132 Cale PTA HDR HDR P143 ls M ieJ Recording Mode P69 Multi exposure P169 Keay Digital Zoom P215 C1 Custom settings P128 Electronic shutter P196 3Stp Sivo IN Overheat indicator P342 STD VIVD NAT Mono Sscny Sport Photo Style P130 355 ele 2 CUST dt Creative control adjustment display P114 46 45489 Flash Mode P219 Safu Flash P222 224 Extra Tele Conversion MEEN when recording motion pictures P211 Recording format ig Recording quality P228 on Picture size Aspect Ratio P139 Extra Tele Conversion when taking still pictures P211 x m is an
305. tems and products mentioned in these instructions are usually the registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers who developed the system or product concerned This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non commercial use of a consumer to i encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard AVC Video and or ii decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See http www mpegla com
306. ter dividing the motion picture with Video Divide P254 Reduce the image size at Size P308 and then send Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red 366 O B s CY Motion picture cannot be transmitted e File format of the motion picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination P277 281 282 285 289 293 e Is the size of the image too large Transmit after dividing the motion picture with Video Divide P254 cannot send images to an AV device e Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device Also sending may take a while Cannot be connected using NFC e Is your smartphone compatible with NFC This unit can be used with NFC compatible terminals via Android OS version 2 3 3 or higher e Make sure the NFC function of your smartphone is ON e Is NFC Operation set to OFF P309 e Some smartphones cannot be easily checked simply by touching If the camera is not recognised even after touching change positions and try again by touching slowly e If the duration of touching is short the smartphone may not be recognised Touch and hold the smartphone for a while TV PC and printer The picture does not appear on the television e Is the camera connected to the TV correctly Set the TV input to external input mode The display areas on the TV screen and the camera s monitor are different e Depending on
307. ter it is executed e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 e Make a copy of password If you forget the password you can reset it with Reset Wi Fi Settings in the Setup menu however other settings will also be reset excluding LUMIX CLUB Network Address Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit e A MAC Address is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment e IP address refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the Internet Usually the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a wireless access point Example 192 168 0 87 S9 O Connecting to other equipment Enjoying 3D pictures O i Taking 3D pictures aS Attaching the 3D interchangeable lens H FT012 optional to the camera allows you to take 3D pictures for extra impact To view 3D pictures a television that supports 3D is required 1 Attach the 3D interchangeable lens to the camera 2 Bring the subject into the frame and record by pressing the shutter button fully e Focusing is not required when recording 3D pictures e Still pictures recorded with the 3D interchangeable lens attached are saved in MPO format 3D To ensure that the 3D pictures can be safely viewed pay attention to the following points when recording e Where possible record with the unit in a horizontal state e The sugg
308. ter occurs during recording distorted subjects may be recorded Use of a tripod is recommended e You can turn off the shutter sound at E Shutter Vol in Beep P53 e Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy the likeness rights etc of the subject when you use this function Use at your own risk Not available in these cases e Electronic Shutter will be fixed to ON when Burst Rate is set to SH e Not available with Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode 2 Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes Taking Clear Pictures by Registering Faces Face Recog Applicable modes mM PASM Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and prioritises focus and exposure automatically Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo the camera can still take a clear picture Select the menu DI Rec Face Recog Settings ON OFF MEMORY Face Recog is initially set to OFF on the camera Face Recog will turn ON automatically when the face image is registered e The following functions will also work with the Face Recognition function In Recording Mode Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face if name has been set for the registered face In Playback Mode Display of name and age if information has been registered Selective playback of pictures chosen fr
309. ternal flash is turned off the camera may enter the external flash mode when the external flash is attached When you are not using the external flash detach it e Do not open the built in flash when an external flash is attached e The camera will become unstable when attaching the external flash it is recommended to use a tripod when taking picture e Detach the external flash when carrying the camera e When attaching the external flash do not hold only the external flash because it may detach from the camera e lf you use the external flash when the White Balance is set to finely adjust the White Balance depending on the picture quality P137 e lf you record at close range with a wide angle light from the flash may be blocked by the lens darkening the lower part of the screen e Refer to P224 about the settings for the wireless flash e Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details 332 amp 2 s CY i Shutter Remote Control optional If you use the shutter remote control DMW RSL1 optional you can avoid jitter Camera shake when using a tripod and you can keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with B Bulb or Burst Mode The shutter remote control works similar to the shutter button on the camera e Always use a genuine Panasonic shutter remote control DMW RSL1 optional e Record with Creative Video Mode P125 when using for motion picture recording Motion picture
310. th an HDMI mini cable e Check the HDMI Mode P57 e During 24p motion picture playback please set HDMI Mode to AUTO For settings other than AUTO it cannot output at 24 frames second e Audio will be played back as stereo 2ch e No picture is displayed on the screen of this unit e Use a High Speed HDMI mini cable with the HDMI logo Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work High Speed HDMI mini cable Type C Type A plug up to 3 m 9 8 feet long Align the marks and insert HDMI socket HDMI mini cable Q9 ok Ql vu Connecting to other equipment To connect with an AV cable optional e Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable DOMW AVC1 optional e Check the TV Aspect P57 e Audio will be played back in monaural e The viewfinder cannot be displayed when connected with a AV cable Align the marks and insert Yellow to the video input socket AV cable optional White to the audio input socket 2 Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use 3 Turn the camera on and then press gt e Input of the TV will switch automatically and playback screen is displayed when connected to a VIERA Link compatible TV using an HDMI mini cable with the VIERA Link P58 set to ON P318 e Depending on the Aspect Ratio black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the pictu
311. the TV model the pictures may be extended horizontally or vertically or they may be displayed with their edges cut off The motion pictures cannot be played back on a TV e Are you trying to play back the motion pictures by directly inserting the card in the card slot of the TV Connect the camera to the TV with the AV cable optional or with the HDMI mini cable and then play back the motion pictures on the camera P315 367 O g oO fomes CY The picture is not displayed fully on the TV Check TV Aspect setting P57 VIERA Link does not work e Is it connected properly with the HDMI mini cable P315 Confirm that the HDMI mini cable is firmly fitted Press on this unit e Is the VIERA Link on this unit set to ON P58 Depending on HDMI terminal of the TV the input channel may not switch automatically In this case use the remote control for the TV to switch input For details on how to switch input please read the operating instructions for the TV Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device Turn this unit off and on Set HDAVI Control to Off on the TV and then turn it back to On Refer to the operating instructions of the TV for details Check Video Out setting P57 Cannot communicate with the PC e Is the camera connected to the PC correctly e Is the camera recognised by the PC correctly Set to PC in USB Mode P56 323
312. the picture quality following step 2 of Adjusting the picture quality and then press DISP e Confirmation screen is displayed It is executed when Yes is selected Image and Picture Quality Settings A Adjusting Bright Dark Portions Highlight Shadow Applicable modes P A S M eM c1 c2 c3 oy You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark portions on an image while checking the brightness on the screen 1 Select the menu Wa Rec Highlight Shadow 2 Press lt P gt to select the item il Item Description of settings V Standard A state with no adjustments is set Bright areas are brightened and dark areas are J Raise the contrast da ened Bright areas are darkened and dark areas are Lower the contrast brightened Brighten dark areas Dark areas are brightened H Custom Registered custom settings can be applied 3 Rotate the front rear dial to adjust the A brightness of bright dark portions DHH sont Bright portion Dark portion Preview display e The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas e To register a preferred setting press A and select the 8 destination where the custom setting will be registered to Custom1 Custom2 Custom3 e Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph Press MENU SET Image and Picture Qualit
313. the settings you have registered using Cust Set Mem Set the mode dial to C1 or C2 e The custom set registered for C 1 or C 2 is called up 1 Set the mode dial to C3 e The custom set registered for C 3 1 C 3 2 or C 3 3 is called up The most recently used custom set is called up e To change a custom set To steps 2 and 3 Press MENU SET to display the menu GQ N Press lt P gt to select the custom setting you want to use and then press MENU SET O It is also possible to display the selection screen by 1 2 touching the Recording Mode icon in Recording Mode TIS e Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen 2 Display custom settings i eE E Changing the settings Registered contents do not change when the menu setting is changed temporarily with the mode dial set to C1 C2 or C3 To change the registered settings overwrite the registered content using Cust Set Mem on the custom settings menu e The following menu settings are not registered in the custom set since they are reflected to other Recording modes Rec menu Setup menu Custom menu e Data registered with Face Recog e All menus e Touch Scroll e The Profile Setup setting e Menu Guide vu Image and Picture Quality Settings Adjusting the Picture Quality by Adding an Effect Photo Style Applicable modes lt P A S M 2u c1 c2 c3 f 6 effects c
314. the subject and the background O O 1 Press the rear dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation 2 Rotate the rear dial to compensate the exposure a Exposure Compensation value Flash Adjust E e 2o s 3 2 peL t Properly Underexposed exposed Compensate the exposure Compensate the exposure towards positive towards negative e You can switch the functions between the rear dial and the front dial by pressing DISP e The Exposure Compensation value can be set within a range of 5 EV to 5 EV When recording motion pictures the Exposure Compensation value can be set within a range of 3 EV to 3 EV e Select 0 to return to the original exposure 3 Rotate the front dial to adjust the flash output e This operation is possible only when Auto Exposure Comp P223 in Flash in the Rec menu is set to ON and Firing Mode P224 in Flash is set to TTL e Flash output can also be adjusted using Flash Adjust in Flash in the Rec Menu P223 u Focus and Exposure Settings e When Auto Exposure Comp in Flash in the Rec menu is set to ON the brightness of the built in flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation P223 e When the exposure value is out of the 3 EV to 3 EV range the brightness of the recording screen will no longer change It is recommended to record by checking the actual brightn
315. tical axis It allows you to easily check a picture s exposure dark l bright e When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the following conditions the histogram is displayed in orange When the Manual Exposure Assistance is other than 0 during Exposure Compensation or in the Manual Exposure Mode When the flash is activated When suitable exposure is not achieved with the flash closed When the brightness of the screen is not correctly displayed in dark places e The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode e The histogram displayed in this camera does not match histograms displayed by picture editing software used in PCs etc Fo Displaying not displaying the guide lines Ua gt Custom Guide Line 4 S4 EX OFF e The guide lines are not displayed in Panorama Shot in Scene Guide Mode When HH is set the position can be set by dragging on the guide lines e When it is difficult to move the guide line on the screen edge by touch operation use the cursor button to set the position Fo Displaying not displaying the on monitor recording information screen Wa Custom Monitor Info Disp ON OFF O E About the tilt sensor display With the tilt sensor displayed it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc 1 Press DISP to display the tilt sensor 2 Check the tilt of the camera a Horizontal direction Correcting
316. ting speed has deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format P60 e Depending on the type of the card motion picture recording may stop in the middle A folder cannot be created e A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used gt Format the card on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc P60 If you execute No Reset in the Setup menu after formatting the folder number is reset to 100 P59 Recording stopped due to overheating Please wait for the camera to cool down Please wait for the camera to cool down e When the camera is overheating during recording due to a high ambient temperature or continuous recording LA flashes If a message is displayed after A flashes the camera will turn off automatically to protect itself If the camera turns off recording will be disabled until it cools down 342 u fomes CY Picture is displayed for 16 9 TV Picture is displayed for 4 3 TV e Select TV Aspect in the Setup menu if you want to change the TV aspect P57 e This message also appears when the USB connection cable is connected to the camera only If the other end of the USB connection cable is connected to a PC or printer the message will disappear P323 326 Editing operation cannot proceed as information processing is ongoing e When there are too many image files the currently retrieving information icon Gh
317. tio setting e The 23 AF areas can be divided into 9 areas and the area to be focused can be set P153 i About 1 Area The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the centre of the screen e Position and size of the AF area can be changed P153 e When the subject is not in the centre of the composition in you can bring the subject into the AF area fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button halfway move the camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed halfway and then take the picture Only when the AFS AFF AFC is set to AFS About Pinpoint You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than e The focus position can be set on an enlarged screen P154 e If the shutter button is pressed halfway the screen for checking the focus position will be enlarged by approximately 3 to 10 times original size e The size of the AF area displayed when the camera has achieved focus may change according to the subject e In the following case operates as When recording motion pictures Focus and Exposure Settings 4 XY Setting up position of the AF area changing size of the AF area e Perform the operation after cancelling the touch shutter function e When setting with touch operation set Touch AF in Touch Settings of the Custom menu to ri When selecting 82 Position an
318. tion P58 in the Setup menu is set to ON explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen e The menu can also be set by touching the screen Example In the Rec menu change Quality from s amp s to u u 41 Press MENU SET U Preparation Menu Rec P345 to 347 ma Motion Picture P235 to 237 fc Custom P349 to 351 Setup P51 to 60 gt Playback P354 2 Press A V of the cursor button to select the Description of settings This menu lets you set the aspect ratio number of pixels and other aspects of the pictures you are recording This menu lets you set the Rec Format Rec Quality and other aspects for motion picture recording Operation of the unit such as displaying of the screen and button operations can be set up according to your preferences Also it is possible to register the modified settings This menu lets you perform the clock settings select the operating beep tone settings and set other settings which make it easier for you to operate the camera You can also configure the settings of Wi Fi related functions This menu lets you set the Protection Cropping or Print Settings etc of recorded pictures Set compression level of picture Photo Style menu item and press MENU SET 7 Aspect Ratio e The menu item can also be selected by rotating the rear dial e You can also move to the next s
319. try or area where the camera was purchased For details on the accessories refer to Basic Operating Instructions e Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text e Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text e SD Memory Card SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the text e The card is optional e Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens H H020A e Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories You can purchase the accessories separately u COND OO BW DY Before Use 4 Names and Functions of Components E Camera body 1 Self timer indicator P186 12 3 AF Assist Lamp P157 Flash P217 Sensor NFC antenna 3 P272 Lens fitting mark P22 Mount Lens lock pin Lens release button P23 9 Eye sensor P63 910111213 141516 10 Eye Cup P372 11 Viewfinder P63 12 LVF button P63 Fn4 button P47 13 Flash open lever P217 The flash opens and recording with the flash becomes possible 14 Focus mode lever P146 158 15 AF AE LOCK button P164 16 Rear dial P18 17 Touch screen monitor P16 18 Q MENU button P43 Fn1 button P47 19 Playback button P75 20 M s Delete Cancel button P80 Fn2 button P47 21 MENU SET button P19 40 22 Wi Fi button P266 Fn3 button P47 23 Wi Fi connection lamp P266 24 Cursor buttons
320. tup with a WPS mark Press the wireless access point e g WPS button until it switches to WPS WPS Push Button Mode l l e Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with Wi Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark 1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to WPS PIN code 2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access point 3 Press MENU SET e Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access point e Refer to P303 for details Manual Connection 302 Wi Fi NFC 4 O If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility connecting by Manual pa Connection Search for available wireless access points e Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network authentication is encrypted e When connecting by Manual Input confirm SSID encryption type encryption key of the wireless access point you are using oO 1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to e Pressing DISP will search for a wireless access point again If no wireless access point is found refer to When connecting with Manual Input on P303 If network authentication is encrypted Enter the encryption key
321. umber of pixels is shown below Recording direction Horizontal Resolution Vertical Resolution Horizontal 8176 pixels 1920 pixels Vertical 2560 pixels 8176 pixels T2 Not available in these cases e A panorama picture may not be able to be created or the pictures may not be combined properly when recording the following subjects or under the recording conditions below Subjects with a single uniform colour or repetitive pattern such as the sky or a beach Moving subjects person pet car waves flowers blowing in the breeze etc Subjects where the colour or patterns change in a short time Such as an image appearing on a display Dark places Locations with flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights or candles e This cannot be used when Silent Mode is set to ON _ _ NO Recording Modes fo Taking Pictures with different image effects Creative Control Mode Recording Mode This mode records with additional image effects You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the screen 1 Set the mode dial to 4 2 Press A F to select the image effects filters e The image effect of the selected example image will be applied in a preview display A e You can also select the image effects filters by touching the example images It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in Recording M
322. unit e Image is not recorded until completion e The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the recording information for the last picture taken e Items shown in grey on the menu screen cannot be set during multiple exposures Not available in these cases e Multi Exp is not available in the following cases When using Time Lapse Shot When using Stop Motion Animation u Focus and Exposure Settings Easily Optimising the Brightness for a Specified Area Touch AE Applicable modes PAP A S M su c1 c2 ca sali amp You can easily optimise the brightness for a touched position When the face of the subject appears dark you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face You can optimise just the brightness for a touched position or by optimising the brightness when using Touch AF you can optimise both the focus and brightness for the touched position I Optimising only the brightness for a touched position 1 Touch iQ 2 Touch za The setting screen for the brightness optimisation position is displayed e Metering Mode is set to gg which is used exclusively for the Touch AE 3 Touch the subject you want to optimise the brightness for e Touching Reset will bring the brightness optimisation position back to the centre Touch Set E Cancelling the Touch AE function Touch e Metering Mode
323. unt 295 U Wi Fi NFC 5 Read through the LUMIX CLUB terms of use and select Agree e You can switch pages by A V e You can enlarge 2x the display by rotating the rear dial to the right e You can reset the enlarged display to its original size 1 x by rotating the rear dial to the left e You can move the position of the enlarged display with A W lt gt Press 7 to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID Enter a password Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password e For details on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text section on P61 Check the login ID and select OK e The login ID 12 digit number will be displayed LEE TALIS automatically When logging in to the LUMIX CLUB with a Login ID computer you only need to enter the numbers A message is displayed when the connection is complete Select OK e Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password Exit the menu after it is set Password 296 pwiemro CY O Using the acquired login ID Checking or changing the login ID or password Set SS Login ID Preparation SS When using the acquired login ID check the ID and password To change the LUMIX CLUB password on the camera access the LUMIX CLUB website from your smartphone tablet or PC and change the LUMIX CLUB password in advance e The login ID and pass
324. ure value shutter speed Creative Video Mode Recording Mode Sy It is possible to manually change the aperture and shutter speed and record motion pictures 1 Set the mode dial to m 2 Select the menu CE Motion Picture Exposure Mode 3 Press A V to select P A S or M and then press MENU SET e The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the operation for setting the mode dialto P A S or M It is also possible to display the selection screen by me touching the Recording Mode icon in Recording Mode La sio C 4 Start recording e Press the motion picture button or the shutter button to start recording a motion picture Still pictures cannot be taken 5 Stop recording e Press the motion picture button or the shutter button to stop recording a motion picture Recording Modes O e Aperture value SS Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background Set the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background e Shutter speed When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject set with a faster shutter speed When you want to create a trail effect set to a slower shutter speed gt Manually setting a higher shutter speed may increase the noise on screen due to the higher sensitivity When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent
325. utter speed is slow e The Sensitivity is automatically set to AUTO when you switch the Recording Mode to Shutter Priority AE Mode while the Sensitivity is set to fiso Intelligent Not available in these cases e When the flash is activated the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1 320th of a second 1 250th of a second with an external flash P220 e The shutter speed slower than 1 second is not available when Electronic Shutter is set to ON Recording Modes Ly Manual Exposure Mode Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed The Manual Exposure Assistance appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate the exposure gt 1 Set the mode dial to M 2 Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed and rotate the front dial to set the aperture value Exposure meter Aperture value Shutter speed Manual Exposure Assistance Aperture value Reduces Increases It becomes easier to defocus It becomes easier to maintain the background focus as far as the background Shutter speed It becomes easier to express It becomes easier to freeze movement movement e The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording screen To check on the recording screen please use Preview P97 or Constant Preview Recording Modes O Manual Exposure Assistance ZEO o7 33 Set
326. uttons 47 Configuring basic settings of this unit Senp MENU ese eraser cece see eee ee tas enters steamers eee cetere teen care 51 Entering Text an tence sees coeneeccnsscous seen ovancenancccacncuavceecsrcwensssceacerncsecccouncue 61 Basic Tips for taking good pictures a a a a ee cee cc cecsencedssr a 62 e Detects orientation of camera Direction Detection Function 0 62 Using the Viewlinder Taaa ne e A ceeesacs 63 e Switching the Monitor Viewfinder cccccssccccsseececcseseeeeseeeeeenseseeeessaseeess 63 Abourthe Eye SONSOA Risk ietternteressianecietdamnta aareectuan aecueinee spanner aniemesecaa 64 e Setting the focus position with the Touch Pad ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 64 Takinga Still picture ceno a tov ccc E E E E E ees 65 e Taking pictures using the Touch Shutter fUNCTION ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 Recording Motion Picture ioc cert cee ces ce cs sea seecccneeee e cece se ceeceees 68 Selecting the Recording Mode ccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneseesseneeees 69 a Switching the Information Displayed on the recording screen 00 71 h Playing Back Pictures Motion Pictures c cccssseeeeesesssessssssssssnseeeseeeenens 75 PIAVING BACK IPICUINCS 2a mer a a here ceeeces a a a Nereee 15 Paymo Back Motion ICUS terms me rete ceo ete eae ean eee nee ne ee cen TT 7 e Changing the information displayed
327. with greater freedom by changing various settings in the Rec menu 1 2 Set the mode dial to P SS 250 125 60 30 15 Press the shutter button halfway and display F 20 28 40 56 8 0 the aperture value and shutter speed value e ne 060 e on the screen a e The shutter speed is automatically set between about 15 seconds and 1 8000th of a second in the following cases When the Sensitivity is set to I SO200 When the aperture value is set to F1 7 when the interchangeable lens H H020A is attached When the aperture value is set to F3 5 when the interchangeable lens H FS1442A is attached While the values are displayed about 10 seconds perform Programme Shift by rotating the rear dial or front dial e It will switch between Programme Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation P166 every time the rear dial is pressed while the values are displayed e The Programme Shift indication appears on the screen To cancel Programme Shift turn off this unit or rotate the front rear dial until the Programme Shift indication disappears Programme Shift can easily be cancelled by setting a function button to One Push AE P98 U Recording Modes d Fo Displaying not displaying the exposure meter Da Custom Expo Meter ON OFF e When Expo Meter is set to ON the exposure meter will be displayed when performing Programme Sh
328. word registered to the LUMIX CLUB cannot be changed on this unit 1 Select the menu ay gt Setup gt Wi Fi gt Wi Fi Setup gt LUMIX CLUB 2 Select Set Add Account 3 Select Set Login ID e The login ID and password are displayed e The password is displayed as e Close the menu if only checking the login ID 4 Select the item to change 5 Enter the login ID or password Login ID e Refer to Entering Text P61 for information on how to enter text Password Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone tablet or PC into the camera If the password differs from the one you created on your smartphone tablet or PC you will not be able to upload images e Exit the menu after it is set 297 Wi Fi NFC 4 O i To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone tablet e Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone tablet is convenient for sending images on this unit to other devices or web services When either this unit or the smartphone tablet has acquired the login ID Sa 1 Connect this unit to the smartphone tablet P270 2 From the Image App menu set the common login ID e The login IDs for this unit and the smartphone tablet become the same e After connecting this unit to the smartphone tablet the setup screen for a common login ID may appear when you display the playback screen You can also set a common login ID by fo
329. x2 When Face Recog is set to ON E will be displayed for birthdays of registered faces P199 already set only when the face of a person 3 years old or younger is detected aa io eal ed u Recording Modes When recording motion pictures A E i Portrait IFN i Scenery RJ i Low Light Ff i Macro A is set if none of the scenes are applicable and the standard settings are set e When R H or E is selected the camera automatically detects a person s face and it will adjust the focus and exposure Face Detection e If a tripod is used for instance and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when the scene detection has been identified as FR the shutter speed will be slower than normal Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures e An optimum scene for the specified subject will be chosen when set to AF tracking e When Face Recog is set to ON and the face similar to the registered face is detected R is displayed in the top right of E M and H e Due to conditions such as the ones below a different scene may be identified for the same subject Subject conditions When the face is bright or dark the size colour and shape of the subject the distance to the subject the contrast of the subject when the subject is moving Recording conditions Sunset sunrise under low brightness conditions when the camera is shaken when zoom is used
330. xposure Settings Setting the upper limit on ISO sensitivity Applicable modes PAIS It will select optimal ISO sensitivity with set value as limit depending on the brightness of the subject uv CAN Rec ISO Limit Set Settings 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 25600 OFF e It will work when the Sensitivity is set to AUTO or fiso Not available in these cases e ISO Limit Set is disabled in the following cases Clear Nightscape Cool Night Sky Warm Glowing Nightscape Scene Guide Mode When recording motion pictures Setting the step increment of ISO sensitivity Applicable modes PAS M You can adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for every 1 3 EV UANI Rec gt ISO Increments Settings L 125 L 160 200 250 320 4 00 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 1 3 EV 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 64 00 8000 10000 12800 16000 20000 25600 1 EV L 125 200 400 800 1 1600 3200 6400 12800 25600 x Only available when Extended ISO is set e When the setting is changed from 1 3 EV to 1 EV Sensitivity will be set to value closest to the value set during the 1 3 EV Set value will not restore when the setting is changed back to 1 3 EV It will stay as the setting selected for 1 EV Focus and Exposure Settings O Extending ISO sensitivity Applicable modes P A S M
331. y Settings 4 e The screen display can be switched by pressing DISP on the brightness adjustment screen Sx HIGHLIGHT 0 Se HIGHLIGHT 0 vu e Settings registered to c c will be stored even after this unit is turned off e Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with A V back to the default setting e Those menu items are shared by the Rec menu and the Motion Picture menu When the setting for either of the two is changed the setting for the other is also changed Image and Picture Quality Settings A Adjusting the White Balance Applicable modes PI A S M fsm c1 c2 c3 f In sunlight under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of white takes on a reddish or bluish tinge this item adjusts to the colour of white which is closest to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source O B 1 Press gt WB 2 Select the White Balance by rotating the rear dial 3 Press the rear dial to set Item Recording conditions AWB Automatic adjustment xt When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky amp When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky A When taking pictures outdoors in the shade O When taking pictures under incandescent lights eal When taking pictures with the flash only n N The manually set value is used sk When using the preset colour temperature setting xlt will operate as AWB
332. y strong magnetic fields created by speakers or large motors e Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by microprocessors may adversely affect this unit disturbing the pictures and or sound e If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor optional Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high voltage lines e lf you record near radio transmitters or high voltage lines the recorded pictures and or sound may be adversely affected Always use the supplied cords and cables If you use optional accessories use the cords and the cables supplied with them Do not extend the cords or the cables Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals e If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals the body of the camera may be damaged and the surface finish may peel off e Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period of time 2 Cleaning fomes CY Before cleaning the camera remove the battery or the DC coupler optional or disconnect the power plug from the outlet Then wipe the camera with a dry soft cloth e When the camera is soiled badly it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth and then with a dry cloth e Wipe off any dirt or dust on the zoom ring and th
333. yed back and audio is played when the motion pictures are played back Sound Music Music is played back Audio Audio only for motion pictures is played back OFF There will be no sound Duration can be set only when OFF has been selected as the Effect setting e When playing back the following pictures the Duration setting is disabled Motion pictures Panorama pictures Group Pictures 244 Playback Editing Playback in Normal Play Picture Only Video Only 3D Play Category Play or Favorite Play can be selected 5 1 Select the menu CAm Playback Playback Mode 2 Select the group to play back by pressing A V and then press MENU SET e Refer to P313 for the method to play back 3D Play pictures in 3D When Category Play is selected in above step 2 3 Press A W lt gt to select the category and then press MENU SET to set e Pictures are sorted into the categories shown below Recording information e g Scene Detection or Scene Guide Modes Fe Face Recog e i Portrait i Night Portrait i Baby in Scene Detection EJ e Clear Portrait Silky Skin Backlit Softness Clear in Backlight Relaxing Tone Sweet Child s Face Clear Night Portrait Scene Guide Mode e i Scenery i Sunset in Scene Detection e Distinct Scenery Bright Blue Sky Romantic Sunset Glow Vivid Sunset Glow Glistening Water Scene Guide Mode
334. yellow while the subject is locked e Lock is cancelled when I is touched vu Focus and Exposure Settings e Exposure is adjusted in accordance with the locked subject when Metering Mode is set to P168 e If it fails to lock AF area will flash in red and disappear Try to lock again AF Tracking may be disabled in certain picture conditions such as when it is very dark In that case the AF Mode operates as B Not available in these cases e In the following cases z operates as Glistening Water Glittering Illuminations Soft Image of a Flower Monochrome Scene Guide Mode Sepia Monochrome Dynamic Monochrome Rough Monochrome Silky Monochrome Soft Focus Star Filter Sunshine Creative Control Mode Monochrome Photo Style When using Time Lapse Shot e Dynamic Tracking function may not work in the following cases When the subject is too small When the recording location is too dark or bright When the subject is moving too fast When the background has the same or similar colour to the subject When jitter is occurring When zoom is operated O 2 Focus and Exposure Settings About E 23 Area Up to 23 AF areas can be focused This is effective when a subject is not in the centre of the screen The AF area frame will be same as image aspect ratio setting AF area frame will be same as image aspect ra

Operating Instructions for advanced features

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents